TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION...

299
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................. 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ........................... 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ............................ 43 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ................................. 109 5 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................ 157 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ............................................. 209 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE .............................................. 221 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ................................................ 261 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ....................................... 279 10 INDEX ................................................................... 287 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Transcript of TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION...

Page 1: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Information Provided by:

Page 2: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Information Provided by:

Page 3: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

▫ Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

m Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 8

1

Information Provided by:

Page 4: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

INTRODUCTIONThank you for selecting a Jeept Wrangler and welcome toour worldwide family.

This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for bothon-road and off-road use. It can go places and performtasks for which conventional two-wheel drive enclosedvehicles were not intended. It handles and maneuversdifferently from many passenger cars both on-road andoff-road, so take time to become familiar with yourvehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’sManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis-sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehiclehandles on different road surfaces. Your driving skillswill improve with experience. When driving off-road orworking the vehicle, don’t overload it or expect it toovercome the laws of nature. Always observe federal,state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate thisvehicle correctly may result in loss of control or anaccident. Be sure to read “On-Road/Off-Road DrivingTips” in this manual.

Roll Over WarningUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over ratethan other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higherground clearance, higher center of gravity, and narrowertrack than many passenger cars. It is capable of perform-ing better in a wide variety of off-road applications.Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused togo out of control. Because of the higher center of gravityand the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control itmay roll over when some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or otherunsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehiclecontrol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may resultin an accident, roll over of the vehicle and serious injuryor death. Because of its open-body construction, yourvehicle offers less protection than closed vehicles in theevent of an accident.

4 INTRODUCTION

Information Provided by:

Page 5: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts providedis a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.government notes that the universal use of existing seatbelts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or moreeach year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2million annually. In a roll over crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than a person wearinga seal belt. Always buckle up.

Although your vehicle may be equipped with a soft topor optional hard top to give the occupants protectionfrom the weather, these tops do not offer structuralprotection in the event of an accident and do not changethe open-body characteristic of the vehicle. Even thoughyour vehicle has a sport bar and side bars for some extraprotection, it is a truly open vehicle-there is no structuralintegrated top and it has low sides and a folding wind-shield. Many of these vehicles do not have fully enclosedhard doors.

Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or whileintoxicated may result in loss of control, collision withother vehicles or objects, going off the road, or overturn-ing, any of which may lead to serious injury or death.Also, failure to use standard seat belts subjects thedriver and passengers to a greater risk of being thrownout of an open-body vehicle than out of a closed vehiclein an accident which can result in injury or death.

INTRODUCTION 5

1

Information Provided by:

Page 6: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

This manual has been prepared with the assistance ofservice and engineering specialists to acquaint you withthe operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It issupplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet andvarious customer oriented documents. You are urged toread these publications carefully. Following the instruc-tions and recommendations in this manual will helpassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be storedin the vehicle for convenient reference and remain withthe vehicle when sold so that the new owner will beaware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorizeddealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trainedtechnicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interestedin your satisfaction.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certainvehicle components contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALConsult the table of contents to determine which sectioncontains the information you desire.

The detailed index, at the rear of the manual, contains acomplete listing of all subjects.

6 INTRODUCTION

Information Provided by:

Page 7: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis manual contains WARNINGS against operatingprocedures which could result in an accident or bodilyinjury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedureswhich could result in damage to your vehicle. If you donot read this entire manual you may miss importantinformation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on astamped plate located on the left front corner of theinstrument panel pad, visible from outside of vehiclethrough windshield. This number also appears on theAutomobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to awindow on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenientrecord of your vehicle identification number and optionalequipment.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.

INTRODUCTION 7

1

Information Provided by:

Page 8: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehiclecould seriously affect its roadworthiness and safetyand may lead to an accident resulting in seriousinjury or death.

8 INTRODUCTION

Information Provided by:

Page 9: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

m Sentry Key Immobilizer System —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Important Note About Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

m Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .14

▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .14

▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .14

m Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .15

m Doors And Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .21

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Driver And Front Passenger SupplementalRestraint Systems (SRS) — Airbags . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .39

2

Information Provided by:

Page 10: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

▫ Safety Checks You Should MakeInside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside TheVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 11: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSThe keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plasticbag with the key code number on it. If you received yourkeys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you thenumber. The key code can also be obtained by the dealerfrom your vehicle invoice.

Ignition KeyInsert the key fully, then turn the switch to one of the fourillustrated positions. The key can be inserted or with-drawn only in the LOCK position.

To remove the ignition key on models with an automatictransmission, place the gearshift lever in P (Park), turnthe ignition key to LOCK, and remove the key.

To remove the ignition key on models with a manualtransmission, depress and hold the key release button,turn the ignition key to LOCK, and remove the key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

2

Information Provided by:

Page 12: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Key-In-Ignition ReminderOpening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION!

Always remove the key from the ignition, and lockall doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDThe Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) preventsunauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling theengine. The system will shut the engine down after 2seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start thevehicle. This system utilizes ignition keys which have anelectronic chip (transponder) embedded into them. Onlykeys that have been programmed to the vehicle can beused to start and operate the vehicle for longer than the2 second validation time period.

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to bearmed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic

regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked orunlocked. During normal operation, the SKIS indicatorlight will come on for 3 seconds immediately after theignition switch is turned on for a bulb check. Afterwards,if the bulb remains on, this indicates a malfunction in theelectronics. If the bulb begins to flash immediately afterthe ignition switch is turned on, this indicates that aninvalid key is being used to start the vehicle. Both ofthese conditions will result in the engine being shutdown after 2 seconds of running. Keep in mind that a keywhich has not been programmed is also considered aninvalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition for thatvehicle.

If the SKIS indicator light comes on during normalvehicle operation (it has been running for longer than 10seconds) a fault has been detected in the electronics andthe vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible.

NOTE:• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible

with remote starting systems. Use of these systemsmay result in vehicle starting problems and loss ofsecurity protection.

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 13: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Mobil Speedpass™, additional Sentry Keys, or anyother transponder equipped components on the samekeychain will not cause a key-related (Transponder)fault unless the additional part is physically heldagainst the ignition key being used when startingthe vehicle. Also, cell phones, pagers, or other RFelectronics will not cause interference with thissystem.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle havebeen programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Important Note About ServiceA four digit PIN number is needed to service the SentryKey Immobilizer System. This number can be obtainedfrom your authorized dealer. However, this number canalso be found on your customer invoice that you weregiven upon receipt of your vehicle.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to thevehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Oncea Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannotbe programmed to any other vehicle.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is providedwith a four digit PIN number. This number is requiredfor dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys maybe performed at an authorized dealer or by using theCustomer Key Programming procedure. This procedureconsists of programming a blank key to the vehicleelectronics. A blank key is one which has never beenprogrammed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.

Customer Key Programming

You can program new keys to the system if you have twovalid keys by doing the following:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) tomatch the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.

2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch andturn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but nolonger than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF andremove the first key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

2

Information Provided by:

Page 14: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignitionswitch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chimewill sound and the SKIS indicator light will begin toflash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove thesecond key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch andturn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10seconds, a single chime will sound. The SKIS indicatorlight will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turnoff.

The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat thisprocess to program up to a total of 8 keys.

General InformationThe Sentry Key Immobilizer System complies with FCCrules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may bereceived, including interference that may cause undes-ired operation.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle may be equipped with a passive steeringwheel lock (manual transmission only). This lock pre-vents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If thesteering wheel is moved a half turn in either directionand the key is not in the ignition, the steering wheel willlock.

To Manually Lock the Steering WheelWith the engine running, rotate the steering wheel 1/2revolution from straight ahead position, turn off theengine and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheelslightly in both directions until the lock engages.

To Release the Steering Wheel LockInsert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightlyto the right or left to disengage the lock.

NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engagethe lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right todisengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engagethe lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 15: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPEDThe interior lights will come on when you open any door.

The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed,and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to offonce the ignition switch is turned on.

DOORS AND LOCKS

NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicleis used to lock or unlock the doors, tailgate, consolestorage, and glove box.

To unlock doors and tailgate insert the key and turn.Once unlocked, the tailgate can be opened or closedwithout using the key.

To open the tailgate, lift the latch release and swing openthe tailgate.

Door LocksDoors on both hard-top and soft-top models areequipped with a rocker-type interior door lock. To lock adoor when leaving your vehicle, press to the “Lock”position and close the door.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

2

Information Provided by:

Page 16: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• For personal security reasons and safety in anaccident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive aswell as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle always remove the keyfrom the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Donot leave children unattended in the vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuperviseduse of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-sonal injuries and death.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features in yourvehicle are the restraint systems. These include the frontand rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, andfront airbags for both the driver and front passenger. Ifyou will be carrying children too small for adult-sizebelts, your seat belts can also be used to hold infant andchild restraint systems.

Please pay close attention to the information in thissection. It tells you how to use your restraint systemproperly to keep you and your passengers as safe aspossible.

WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can sufferinjuries, including fatalities, if you are not properlybuckled up. You can strike the interior of yourvehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown outof the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in yourvehicle are buckled up properly.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 17: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, evenon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driverand cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and thatthey can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.Some of the worst injuries happen when people arethrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibilityof ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking theinside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle shouldbe belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries.

Lap/Shoulder BeltsThe outboard front and rear seats of your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock duringvery sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows theshoulder part of the belt to move freely with you undernormal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lockand reduce the risk of your striking the inside of thevehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat usinga seat belt properly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

2

Information Provided by:

Page 18: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seatbelts are designed to go around the large bones ofyour body. These are the strongest parts of yourbody and take the forces of a collision the best.Wearing your belt in the wrong place could makeyour injuries in a collision much worse. Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you could evenslide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keepyour passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a singleseat belt. People belted together can crash into oneanother in an accident, hurting one another badly.Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt formore than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back andadjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the frontseat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latchplate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up thewebbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go aroundyour lap.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latchplate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 19: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle willnot protect you properly. The lap portion couldride too high on your body, possibly causinginternal injuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

• A belt that is loose will not protect you as well. Ina sudden stop you could move too far forward,increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seatbelt snugly.

• A belt that is worn under your arm is verydangerous. Your body could strike the insidesurfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasinghead and neck injury. A belt worn under the armcan cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong asshoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulderso that the strongest bones will take the force in acollision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protectyou from injury during a collision. You are morelikely to hit your head in a collision if you do notwear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulderbelt are meant to be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull upon the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug beltreduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

2

Information Provided by:

Page 20: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk ofinternal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’tbe at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but acrossyour abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low aspossible and keep it snug.

• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In acollision it could even cut into you. Be sure thebelt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt inyour vehicle, take it to your dealer and have itfixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it iscomfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractorwill withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing toallow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collisionand leave you with no protection. Inspect the beltsystem periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or looseparts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a collision if theyhave been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.).

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 21: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the front seats, the shoulder belt anchorage can beadjusted upward or downward to position the belt awayfrom your neck. Push in on the anchorage near youroutside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach theposition that serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you willprefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release theanchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure thatit is locked in position.

Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenWe recommend that pregnant women use seat beltsthroughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe isthe best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the beltacross the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.Keep the belt low so that it does not come across theabdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will takethe force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended andwhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (ifequipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer canprovide you with a seat belt extender. This extendershould be used only if the existing belt is not longenough. When it is not required, remove the extenderand store it.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

2

Information Provided by:

Page 22: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed canincrease the risk of injury in a collision. Only usewhen the seat belt is not long enough when it isworn low and snug, and in the recommended seatingpositions. Remove and stow the seat belt extenderwhen not needed.

Driver And Front Passenger SupplementalRestraint Systems (SRS) — Airbags

This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver andfront passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraintsystem. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the centerof the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag ismounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-partment. The words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on theairbag covers.

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federalregulations that allow less forceful deployment.

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deploy-ment.

WARNING!

Do not put anything on or around the front airbagcovers or attempt to manually open them. You maydamage the airbags and you could be injured be-cause the airbags are not there to protect you. Theseprotective covers for the airbag cushions are de-signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 23: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Alongwith the seat belts, front airbags work with the instru-ment panel knee bolsters to provide improved protectionfor the driver and front passenger.

The seat belts are designed to protect you in many typesof collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate tosevere frontal collisions. But even in collisions where theairbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in theright position for the airbags to protect you properly.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize therisk of harm from a deploying airbag.

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ridebuckled up in a rear seat.

Infants in rear-facing child restraints (designed for chil-dren up to 20 lbs (9 kg) and at least one year old) shouldNEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passen-ger front airbag, unless the airbag is turned off. An airbagdeployment can cause severe injury or death to infants inthis position.

Children that are not big enough to properly wear thevehicle seat belt (Refer to “Child Restraint” in thissection.) should be secured in the rear seat, in a childrestraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older childrenwho do not use child restraints or belt-positioningbooster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rearseat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder beltbehind them or under their arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the frontpassenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move theseat as far back as possible, and use the proper childrestraint. Refer to “Child Restraint” in this section.

You should read the instructions provided with yourchild restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder beltsproperly.

3. The driver and front passenger seats should be movedback as far as practical to allow the front airbags room toinflate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

2

Information Provided by:

Page 24: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to moresevere injuries in a collision. The airbags workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. Insome collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.Always wear your seat belts even though youhave airbags.

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-ment panel during airbag deployment could causeserious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sitback, comfortably extending your arms to reachthe steering wheel or instrument panel.

Airbag System ComponentsThe airbag system consists of the following:

• Airbag Control Module (ACM)

• Airbag Warning Light

• Driver Airbag

• Passenger Airbag

• Steering Wheel And Column

• Instrument Panel

• Crash Sensor

• Interconnecting Wiring

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch (If Equipped)

How The Airbag System Works

• The Airbag Control Module (ACM) determines if afrontal collision is severe enough to require the airbagsto inflate.

• The ACM will not detect side, roll over, or rearimpacts.

• The ACM also monitors the readiness of the electronicparts of the system whenever the ignition switch is inthe START or ON position. These include all of theitems listed above except the knee bolster, the instru-ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If theignition key is in the OFF or ACC position, or not inthe ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 25: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Also, the ACM turns on the “Airbag Warning Light” inthe instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when theignition is first turned on, then turns the light off. If itdetects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turnson the light either momentarily or continuously. If theACM detects a malfunction, the “Airbag WarningLight” will illuminate for a minimum of 12 secondsand will remain illuminated as long as the malfunctionexists.

WARNING!

Ignoring the “Airbag Warning Light” in your instru-ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbagsto protect you in a collision. If the light does notcome on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if itcomes on as you drive, have the airbag systemchecked right away.

• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units arelocated in the center of the steering wheel and in theinstrument panel. When the ACM detects a collisionrequiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. Alarge quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflatethe airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out ofthe way as the bags inflate to full size. The bags fullyinflate in about 50 milliseconds. This is about half ofthe time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags thenquickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver andfront passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is ventedthrough the airbag material towards the instrumentpanel. The passenger’s front airbag gas is ventedthrough vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In thisway the airbags do not interfere with your control ofthe vehicle.

• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees andposition the driver and front passenger’s for the bestinteraction with the front airbag.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

2

Information Provided by:

Page 26: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch — If Equipped

NOTE: The Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch is de-signed so that the switch position can be changed usingthe ignition key. The key inserts into the switch farenough to fully depress a spring-loaded locking plunger,and then rotates to the desired position. The key will notinsert fully into the switch, and the spring-loaded lockingplunger prevents the key from remaining in the switch.

The Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch is located on theinstrument panel. The switch is to be turned off only ifthe passenger is an infant (less than 1 year old) or a child(age 1 to 12) who must ride in the front seat because thereis no rear seat.

WARNING!

Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) orwindshield in a crash. This may result in seriousinjury or death.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 27: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag

1. Turn ignition to OFF position.

2. Remove the water-resistant plug.

3. Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch, press inward and turn the key to the right tothe OFF position. This will shut off the passenger airbag.

4. Reinstall the water-resistant plug.

NOTE: When the Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch isin the OFF position, a indicator light will illuminate whenthe ignition is ON. If the indicator light does not illumi-nate for 3 seconds after the ignition is turned ON, orwhen the Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch is turnedOFF (while ignition is in the ON position), have anauthorized dealer service the system immediately.

To Turn On the Passenger Airbag

1. Turn ignition to OFF position.

2. Remove the water-resistant plug.

3. Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch, press inward and turn the key to the left tothe ON position. This will turn on the passenger airbag.

4. Reinstall the water-resistant plug.

NOTE: Do not turn the Passenger Airbag ON/OFFSwitch on or off with the ignition in the ON/RUN orSTART positions, as the ACM could cause the “AirbagWarning Lamp” to illuminate.

If A Deployment OccursThe airbag system is designed to deploy when the impactsensors detect a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, tohelp restrain the driver and right front passenger, andthen to immediately deflate.

NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough toneed airbag protection will not activate the system. Thisdoes not mean something is wrong with the airbagsystem.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

2

Information Provided by:

Page 28: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, anyor all of the following may occur:

• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and frontpassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold.

The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns orthose you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna-sium floor. They are not caused by contact withchemicals. They are not permanent and normally healquickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantlywithin a few days, or if you have any blistering, seeyour doctor immediately.

• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-likeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of theprocess that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbaginflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throatirritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,see your doctor.

If these particles settle on your clothing, follow thegarment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after theairbags have deployed. If you are involved in anothercollision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed airbags cannot protect you in anothercollision. Have the airbags replaced by an autho-rized dealer as soon as possible.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 29: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the airbag systemcould cause it to fail when you need it. You couldbe injured because the airbags are not there toprotect you. Do not modify the components orwiring, including adding any kind of badges orstickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover orthe upper right side of the instrument panel. Donot modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-ture, or frame.

• You need proper knee impact protection in acollision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarketequipment on or behind the knee bolster.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of theairbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone whoworks on your vehicle that it has airbags.

Airbag Warning LightYou will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for yourprotection in an collision. While the airbag system isdesigned to be maintenance free, if any of the followingoccurs, have an authorized dealer service the systemimmediately.

• The “Airbag Warning Light” does not come on orflickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignitionswitch is first turned on.

• The “Airbag Warning Light” remains on or flickersafter the 6 to 8 second interval.

• The “Airbag Warning Light” flickers or comes on andremains on while driving.

Child RestraintEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all thetime-babies and children, too. Every state in the UnitedStates and all Canadian provinces require that smallchildren ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

2

Information Provided by:

Page 30: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashstatistics, children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tinybaby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. Theforce required to hold even an infant on your lap canbecome so great that you could not hold the child, nomatter how strong you are. The child and otherscould be badly injured. Any child riding in yourvehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’ssize.

Infants and Small ChildrenThere are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Always check the childseat owner’s manual to ensure that you have the rightseat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct foryour child.

• The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weigh-ing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and one year old or more.The infant restraint must NEVER be used in the frontseat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag unlessthe airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment couldcause severe injury or death to infants in this position.The infant carrier is held in the vehicle by the lap belt,lap/shoulder belt, or the LATCH child restraint an-chorage system.

• Children under one year of age should continue to ridein a rear-facing infant seat, even if they weigh morethan 20 lbs (9 kg). A “convertible” child seat, one thatis designed to be used either rearward-facing orforward-facing, should be used for children who aretoo heavy for the infant carrier, but who are too youngto face forward in the vehicle.

• The forward-facing child seat is for children fromabout 20–40 lbs (9–18 kg), and more than one year old.The child seat is held in the vehicle by the lap belt,lap/shoulder belt, or the LATCH child restraint an-chorage system.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 31: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too smallto fit in the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the childcannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion whilethe child’s back is against the seat back, they shoulduse a belt-positioning booster seat. The child andbooster seat are held in the vehicle by lap/shoulderbelt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a frontshield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion orlap belt.)

• For additional information, refer towww.seatcheck.org.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of aninfant or child restraint. It could come loose in acollision. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-actly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• A rearward facing infant restraint should only beused in a rear seat unless the passenger frontalairbag is turned off. If the airbag is left on, arearward facing infant restraint in the front seatmay be struck by a deploying passenger airbagwhich may cause severe or fatal injury to theinfant.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

2

Information Provided by:

Page 32: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your childrestraint:

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. The manufacturer also recommends thatyou make sure that you can install the child restraint inthe vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’sweight and height. Check the label on the restraint forweight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instructions that come with therestraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it maynot work when you need it.

• The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinchinglatch plates designed to keep the lap portion or lap belttight around the child restraint so that it is notnecessary to use a locking clip. Pull up on the shoulderportion of the lap/shoulder belt, or on the free end ofthe lap belt to tighten the belt. The cinching latch platewill keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt systemwill loosen with time, so check the belt occasionallyand pull it tight if necessary.

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening thelap belt or lap/shoulder belt on the child restraintbecause the buckle or latch plate is too close to the beltpath opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latchplate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-endbelt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plateinto the buckle with the release button facing out.

• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling andpushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnectthe latch plate from the buckle, turn the bucklearound, and insert the latch plate into the buckleagain. If you still cannot make the child restraintsecure, try a different seating position.

• Buckle the child into the seat according to the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it withthe seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leaveit loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, itcould strike the occupants or seat backs and causeserious personal injury.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 33: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (LowerAnchors and Tether for CH ildren)Your vehicle’s front passenger and two rear outboard (ifequipped) seating positions are equipped with the childrestraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCHsystem provides for the installation of the child restraintwithout using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securingthe child restraint using lower anchorages and uppertether straps from the child restraint to the vehiclestructure.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-able. However, because the lower anchorages are to beintroduced over a period of years, child restraint systemshaving attachments for those anchorages will continue toalso have features for installation using the vehicle’s seatbelts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks forconnection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-able for some time. For some older child restraints, manychild restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strapkits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of allthe available attachments provided with your child re-straint in any vehicle.

The two rear outboard seating positions have loweranchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mountedlower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attach-ments must be installed in the outboard positions only.Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such thattwo seats share a common lower anchorage. If installingchild seats in adjacent rear-seating positions or if yourchild restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install therestraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child RestraintSystemWe urge that you carefully follow the directions of themanufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not allchild restraint systems will be installed as described here.Again, carefully follow the installation instructions thatwere provided with the child restraint system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

2

Information Provided by:

Page 34: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

The front passenger and rear seat lower anchorages areround bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion whereit meets the seat back, and are just visible when you leaninto the rear seat to install the child restraint. You willeasily feel them if you run your finger along the inter-section of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.

Front Seat Latch Anchors

Rear Seat Latch Anchors

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 35: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind thefront passenger and the rear seat (on the floor behindeach rear outboard seating position).

Front Seat TetherRear Seat Tether Anchor

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

2

Information Provided by:

Page 36: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped withseparate straps on each side, with each having a hook orconnector for attachment to the lower anchorage and ameans of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infantrestraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, ahook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and ameans of adjusting the tension of the strap.

You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps andon the tether strap so that you can more easily attach thehooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Nextattach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of theanchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.Then lift the tether anchorage cover directly behind theseat where you are placing the child restraint and attachthe tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to routethe tether strap to provide the most direct path betweenthe anchor and the child restraint. If the Add-A-Trunk™option is present in the vehicle, the lid should be openedand positioned against the back of the rear seat prior toattaching and adjusting the strap. Finally, tighten all threestraps as you push the child restraint rearward and

downward into the seat, removing slack in the strapsaccording to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to theLATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant orchild restraint. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle SeatBeltThe passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latchplates, which are designed to keep the lap portion tightaround the child restraint so that it is not necessary to usea locking clip. Pull up on the shoulder portion of thelap/shoulder belt to tighten the belt. The cinching latchplate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat beltsystem will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-ally and pull it tight if necessary.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 37: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening thelap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because thebuckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path openingon the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from thebuckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several timesto shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with therelease button facing out.

If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if by pulling andpushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may needto do something more. Disconnect the latch plate fromthe buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latchplate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make thechild restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

Route the tether strap over the front passenger seat backand attach the hook to the tether anchor located on theback of the seat. For the rear outboard seating positions,route the tether over the rear seat and attach to the rearfloor tether anchors. If the Add-A-Trunk™ option ispresent in the vehicle, the lid should be opened andpositioned against the back of the rear seat prior toattaching and adjusting the strap.

Front Seat Tether

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

2

Information Provided by:

Page 38: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead toincreased head motion and possible injury to thechild. Use only the anchor positions directly behindthe child seat to secure a child restraint top tetherstrap.

Children Too Large for Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder beltcomfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bendover the front of the seat when their back is against theseat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is seated upright in the seat.

• The lap belt portion should be low on the hips and assnug as possible.

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming orslouching can move the belt out of position.

Rear Seat Tether Anchor

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 39: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• If the shoulder belt contacts the child’s face or neck,move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under anarm or behind their back.

Transporting PetsAirbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possiblyinjured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or ina collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnessesor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONSA long break-in period is not required for the engine inyour new vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within thelimits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can bedetrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is ahigh quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oilchanges should be consistent with anticipated climateconditions under which vehicle operations will occur.The recommended viscosity and quality grades areshown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENTOR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BEUSED.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

2

Information Provided by:

Page 40: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

A new engine may consume some oil during its first fewthousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should beconsidered as a normal part of the break-in and notinterpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbonmonoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.Breathing it can make you unconscious and caneventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)follow the safety tips below.

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbonmonoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for a extended period. If the vehicle is

stopped in an open area with engine running for morethan a short period, adjust the ventilation system toforce fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every timethe vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditionsrepaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all sidewindows fully open.

• Always run the climate control in panel or floor modewhen driving with any windows open, even if onlyslightly, to help keep fresh air circulating inside ve-hicle. Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn intothe vehicle.

• On hardtop models, keep the tailgate window closedwhen driving your vehicle. On fabric top models, donot drive with the rear window curtain up unless theside curtains are also open. This will prevent carbonmonoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 41: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside TheVehicle

Seat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident ifthey have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractorcondition, replace the belt.

Airbag Warning LightThe light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8seconds as a indicator check when the ignition switch isfirst turned on. If the indicator is not lit during starting,have it serviced. If the light stays on or comes on whiledriving, have the system checked by an authorizeddealer.

DefrostersCheck operation by selecting the defrost mode and placethe blower control on high speed. You should feel the airdirected against the windshield.

Safety Checks You Should Make Outside TheVehicle

TiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewallcracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires (includ-ing spare) for proper pressure.

LightsHave someone observe the operation of all exterior lightswhile you work the controls. Check turn signal and highbeam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumesare detected, the cause should be located and correctedimmediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

2

Information Provided by:

Page 42: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Information Provided by:

Page 43: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

▫ Inside Automatic Dimming Compass/Temperature Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .46

▫ Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . .50

▫ Tilting Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

▫ Fold And Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

▫ Removing The Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

▫ Replacing The Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

▫ Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights, AndHeadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

▫ Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .58

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

3

Information Provided by:

Page 44: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

▫ Daytime Running Lights — Canada Only . . . . .58

m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . .58

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

m Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

m Cigar Lighter And Ashtrays — If Equipped . . . .62

m Electrical Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . .63

m Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

m Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

▫ Console Storage Compartment —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

▫ Add-A-Trunk™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .65

m Dual Top — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

▫ Removing The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

▫ Installing The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

m Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

▫ Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

44 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 45: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

m Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

▫ Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ Putting Up The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

▫ Sunrider™ — If Equipped (Unlimited ModelsOnly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

m Door Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ Door Frame Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

m Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Lowering The Windshield And RemovingSide Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

▫ Raising The Windshield And ReplacingSide Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 45

3

Information Provided by:

Page 46: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night MirrorThe mirror should be adjusted to center on the viewthrough the rear window. A two-point pivot systemallows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of themirror.

Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving thesmall control under the mirror to the night position(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjustedwhile set in the day position (toward windshield).

Inside Automatic Dimming Compass/TemperatureMirror — If EquippedThe automatic day/night mirror is equipped with threebuttons: the left switch for the left LED lamp, the rightswitch for the right side LED lamp and the center switchfor the compass/temperature function. Pressing the leftand right switches simultaneously for more than 5 sec-onds will turn the auto dim function on or off. If thefeature is turned off, it will automatically turn back onwith the next ignition cycle. A green light next to the rightbutton will indicate when the dimming feature is acti-vated active. The mirror also senses the backup lampcircuit, and will automatically disable its self-dimmingfeature whenever the transmission gear selector is in theR (Reverse) position.

46 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 47: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,never spray any cleaning solution directly onto themirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth andwipe the mirror clean.

The compass/temperature display provides the outsidetemperature and one of eight compass headings (N, NE,E, SE, S, SW, W, NW).

Each time the center button is pressed and releasedwithin 3 seconds, the display toggles through the follow-ing three configurations:

• display compass/temperature (Fahrenheit),

• display compass/temperature (Celsius),

• and display off.

Compass Calibration

Automatic CalibrationOnce calibrated, the compass has the ability to self-correct for changes in magnetic field to keep the compassaccurate. This is referred to as Automatic Calibration. Ifmagnetic field changes are too great, the compass willenter CAL mode on it’s own and manual calibration willbe required. To recalibrate the compass, drive the vehicleat less than 5 mph (8 km/h) through up to 11⁄2 360° turnsin an area free from large metal objects or power lines.When the compass has been calibrated, the CAL symbolwill turn off and the compass will function normally.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 47

3

Information Provided by:

Page 48: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

When the vehicle is new, the compass should initially beverified for correct compass variance (refer to CompassVariation Adjustment) and calibrated manually (refer toManual Calibration). This will ensure correct initial cali-bration and eliminate initial erroneous compass head-ings.

Manual CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and CAL does not appear,you must manually put the compass into the calibrationmode. To ensure proper compass calibration, make surethe compass variance is properly set before manuallycalibrating the compass (refer to Compass VariationAdjustment).

To put the compass into calibration mode: Turn theignition to the ON position. Press and hold the centerbutton for more than 6 seconds until CAL (calibrationmode) appears in the display. To change the displaybetween VAR (compass variance) and CAL (compasscalibration) modes. Release the button to invoke manualcalibration mode. To recalibrate the compass, drive thevehicle at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) through up to CALshould display for a complete 11⁄2 360° turns in an area

free from large metal objects or power lines. When thecompass has been calibrated, the CAL symbol will turnoff and the compass will function normally.

Compass Variation AdjustmentCompass Variance is the difference between magneticnorth and geographic north. In some areas of the country,the difference between magnetic and geographic north isgreat enough to cause the compass to give false readings.If this occurs, the compass variance must be set accordingto the Compass Variance Map.

NOTE: When the mirror is in the VAR mode, the letter“Z” will be displayed along with the currently selectedzone number.

48 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 49: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON, and press andhold the center button for 3 to 6 seconds. The lastvariance zone number will be displayed. Each press ofthe center button will select a new variance zone. Whenthe proper zone is selected, wait 5 seconds to resumenormal operation.

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slightoverlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 49

3

Information Provided by:

Page 50: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Vehicles and other objects seen in the right sideconvex mirror will look smaller and f arther awaythan they really are. Relying too much on yourright side mirror could cause you to collide withanother vehicle or other object.

• Use your inside mirror when judging the size ordistance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror.

SEATS

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving isdangerous. The sudden movement of the seat couldcause you to lose control. The seat belt might not beproperly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjustany seat only while the vehicle is parked.

Front Seat AdjustmentMove seat forward or rearward by lifting the lever. Besure the latch engages fully.

Front Seat Adjustment — ReclineTo adjust seatback, lift lever, lean back, and release leverat desired position. To return seatback, lift the lever, leanforward and release the lever.

50 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 51: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that theshoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.In a collision you could slide under the seat belt andbe seriously or even fatally injured. Use the reclineronly when the vehicle is parked.

Tilting Front SeatsPush the lever upward on the seatback to tilt the entireseat forward.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 51

3

Information Provided by:

Page 52: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Fold And Tumble Rear SeatTo expand the cargo area:

1. Slide seat belts through the seat cushions into thecargo area.

2. Lift the seatback release lever and fold seatback for-ward.

3. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.

52 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 53: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

4. Secure the seat with the strap. Wrap strap aroundsport bar, and put one end of the strap through loop ofthe other end. Pull to tighten strap around sport bar.Place the opposite loop around hook of seat. Route thestrap so that it is between the plates of the seat toeliminate slack and increase tension, as shown.

5. When completed, return seat to it’s normal position.

Removing the Rear Seat

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 53

3

Information Provided by:

Page 54: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• First fold the rear seat forward following steps 1through 3 under “Fold and Tumble Rear Seat” in thissection.

• Press down on release bar on each side, and pull seatout and away from lower bracket.

• Remove seat from the vehicle.

Replacing the Rear SeatReverse steps for removing the seat. Be certain to pull theseat belts between the seat cushion and seatback. Positionthem for passenger use.

WARNING!

• To help protect against personal injury, passen-gers should not be seated in the rear cargo areawith the rear seat folded down or removed fromthe vehicle.

• The rear cargo space is intended for load carryingpurposes only, not for passengers, who should sitin seats and use seat belts.

54 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 55: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOODTo open hood, first release both hood latches.

Next, locate handle in middle of the front end of thehood. Insert hand into gap between hood and radiatorsupport and lift up on handle to raise hood. You mayhave to push down slightly on hood before lifting up onhandle. Insert the support rod into the slot in the radiatorsupport.

To close the hood, remove the support rod from theradiator support and place it in the retaining clip. Lowerthe hood slowly, then let it drop the last few inches.Secure both of the hood latches.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 55

3

Information Provided by:

Page 56: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up whenthe vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.Be sure all hood latches are latched fully beforedriving.

LIGHTS

Interior LightsThe overhead light comes on when a door is opened. Itmay also be turned on by rotating the control for thedimmer switch on the muti-function control lever fullyupward.

The overhead light will automatically turn off in about 20minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is leftin the dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON torestore the overhead light operation.

Daytime Brightness FeatureCertain instrument panel components (odometer, radiodisplay) can be illuminated at full brightness during thedaytime. This can be helpful when driving with yourheadlights on during the daytime such as in a parade ora funeral procession. To activate this feature, rotate theleft stalk one detent lower than the dome light.

Multi-Function Control LeverThe multi-function control lever controls the operation ofthe parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming,and turn signals.

56 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 57: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights, andHeadlightsTurn the end of the multi-function control lever to thefirst detent for parking lights and instrument panellights. Turn to the second detent for headlight operation.

To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,rotate the center portion of the muti-function controllever up or down.

NOTE: If the driver’s door is left open, and the head-lights or parking lights are left on, the “High BeamIndicator Light” will flash and a chime will sound.

Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignitionis turned off, a chime will sound when the driver’s dooris opened.

Headlight Dimmer SwitchPull the multi-function control lever towards you toswitch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the muti-function control lever a second time to switch the head-lights to LOW beam.

Passing LightYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights bylightly pulling the multi-function control lever towardthe steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turnon at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 57

3

Information Provided by:

Page 58: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Front Fog Lights — If EquippedThe front fog light switch is in the multi-functioncontrol lever. To activate the front fog lights, turnon the parking or low beam headlights and pull

out the end of the lever.

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the park-ing lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting highbeam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Turn SignalsMove the multi-function control lever up or down andthe arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash toshow proper operation of the front and rear turn signallights. You can signal a lane change by moving the leverpartially up or down without moving beyond the detent.

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is avery fast flash rate, check for a defective outside lightbulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever ismoved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb isdefective.

NOTE: A tone will chime if the turn signals are left onfor more than 1 mile (2 km).

Daytime Running Lights — Canada OnlyThe headlights come on at a low intensity level after thevehicle has been driven approximately 3 feet (1 meter).They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or whenthe headlights are switched on.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

CAUTION!

In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switchand allow the wipers to return to the park positionbefore turning off the engine. If the wiper switch isleft on and the wipers freeze to the windshield,damage to the wiper motor may occur when thevehicle is restarted.

Intermittent Wiper SystemUse the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsmake a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-tween cycles, desirable. Move the lever to the DELAYposition, then select the delay interval by turning the end

58 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 59: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

of the lever. The delay can be regulated from a maximumof approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycleevery second.

Windshield Wiper OperationMove the lever upward to the second detent for LO speedwiper operation, or to the third detent for HI speedoperation

Windshield WashersTo use the washer, pull the lever toward you and holdwhile spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in thedelay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cyclesafter the lever is released, and then resume the intermit-tent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wiperswill operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipecycles, then turn OFF.

Mist FeaturePush down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe toclear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. Aslong as the lever is held down, the wipers will continueto operate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 59

3

Information Provided by:

Page 60: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

TILT STEERING COLUMNTo tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turnsignal control and move the wheel up or down, asdesired. Pull the lever back upwards to lock the columnfirmly in place.

WARNING!

Tilting the steering column while the vehicle ismoving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and havean accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROLWhen engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-tions at speeds greater than 35 mph (60 km/h). Thecontrols are mounted on the steering wheel and consist ofON·OFF, SET, RESUME/ACCEL, CANCEL, and COASTcontrols.

60 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 61: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

To ActivatePress and release the ON·OFF button to turn the systemon. To turn the system off, press the ON·OFF buttonagain. The system should be turned off when not in use.The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument clusterilluminates when the system is on.

To Set At A Desired SpeedWhen the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pressand release the SET button. Release the accelerator andthe vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressingthe CANCEL button will deactivate the Speed Controlwithout erasing the memory. Pressing the ON·OFF but-ton or turning off the ignition erases the memory.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, press and release theRESUME/ACCEL button. Resume can be used at anyspeed above 30 mph (50 km/h).

To Vary The Speed SettingWhen the Speed Control is on and set, speed can beincreased by pressing and holding the RESUME/ACCELbutton. When the button is released, a new set speed willbe established.

Tapping the RESUME/ACCEL button once will result ina 2 mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button istapped, speed increases, so tapping the button threetimes will increase speed by 6 mph (9 km/h), etc.

To decrease speed while speed control is on and set, pressand hold the COAST button. Release the button when thedesired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 61

3

Information Provided by:

Page 62: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

To Accelerate for PassingDepress the accelerator as you would normally. When thepedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000ft. (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below theSET speed. (If the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48km/h), the Speed Control will automatically disengage).If this happens, you can push down on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the desired speed.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control on when not in use isdangerous. You could accidentally set the system orcause it to go faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always turn the systemoff when you are not using it.

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS — IFEQUIPPEDThe vehicle may be equipped with a cigar lighter recep-tacle, element, and ashtray (Smoker’s Package Only). Thecigar lighter will be located in the lower instrument panel(near the heater controls), and the removable ashtray willbe located in the center console.

62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 63: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETTo the right of the cigar lighter (if equipped) is the 12 voltpower outlet. The outlet is connected directly to thebattery, items plugged into this outlet may discharge thebattery and/or prevent engine starting. The outlet in-cludes a tethered cap labeled with a battery symbolindicating the power source.

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off

WARNING!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in drawpower from the vehicle’s battery, even when notin use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, ifplugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery willdischarge sufficiently to degrade battery lifeand/or prevent engine starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade thebattery even more quickly. Only use these inter-mittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, orlong periods of the vehicle not being started (withaccessories still plugged in), the vehicle must bedriven a sufficient length of time to allow thealternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugsonly. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damage not covered byyour warranty.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63

3

Information Provided by:

Page 64: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CUP HOLDERSIn the center console there are two cup holders for thefront seat passengers.

NOTE: The cup holder insert is removable from theconsole, for cleaning.

The rear passengers have cup holders at the rear of thecenter console.

64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 65: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

STORAGE

Glove CompartmentTo unlock the glove compartment, insert the key andturn. To open, pull the latch up.

Console Storage Compartment — If EquippedTo unlock, insert key and turn. To open, press the latchbutton.

Add-A-Trunk™ — If EquippedThe factory-installed Add-A-Trunk™ option provides asecured compartment for parcels or equipment when thetailgate is closed and locked. To gain access to thiscompartment, simply open the tailgate and release thespring loaded latch pins. The cover of the Add-A-Trunk™ can then be raised.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65

3

Information Provided by:

Page 66: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

When the Add-A-Trunk™ is not desired, it can be easilyremoved from the rear compartment. Remove the fourknobs that secure the “trunk” to the body. Lift theAdd-A-Trunk™ out and place the knobs in the molded-instorage area. Storage space is also provided for the wheellock, and lock key tool.

Do not leave the Add-A-Trunk™ loose in your vehicle.Remove it and store it in a safe place.

DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPEDIf your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you mustremove one of the tops from the vehicle. The soft topwas installed at the factory for shipping purposes only.The soft top and the hard top are to be used indepen-dently. Removal is mandatory to prevent any possiblewear and tear on the soft top, should both tops remain onthe vehicle at the same time. Failure to do so may voidyour soft top warranty.

Removing The Soft Top

1. Locate and remove the 2 boxes that contain thefollowing items:

• right and left door frames

• door frame attachment knobs (4)

• right and left quarter windows

• rear tailgate window

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Hard Top Removal” inthis section.

3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracketscrews (2 per side) using a #30 Torxt head driver.

66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 67: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

4. Using a rubber mallet, carefully tap the knuckles fromthe outside edge. This will remove the bow assemblyfrom the pivot bracket. Remove the soft top from thevehicle and store in a clean, dry location.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67

3

Information Provided by:

Page 68: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose thepivot bracket. Remove the brackets using a #T40 Torxthead driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar cover.Store pivot brackets and screws in a safe place.

6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Hard Top Installation”in this section.

Installing the Soft Top

NOTE: The following procedures are for first time setup only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “SoftTop” in this section.

1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hardtop removal:

• right and left door frames

• door frame attachment knobs (4)

• right and left quarter windows

• rear tailgate window.

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Hard Top Removal” inthis section.

3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in thissection.

4. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps toreinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle,proceed to step #4.

a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzipthe sport bar cover and attach the pivot brackets andscrews with a #T40 Torxt head driver. Re-cover andre-zip sport bar cover.

b. If the door frames have been removed, re-installthem (refer to “Door Frame” in this section).

68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 69: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

c. Lay the soft top back into the vehicle with thecurved portion of the bows facing upward.

d. Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber malletto reattach them to the pivot bracket.

e. Screw the pivot screws back into place. Securethem until they are snug being careful not to cross-thread the screws.

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip thescrews if they are overtightened.

5. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This covershould be discarded. It was intended as a protectivecover for shipping only.

NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dualtop wrap.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69

3

Information Provided by:

Page 70: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

6. Open the tailgate.

7. Remove the tailgate bar (black bar with end caps) thatis located in the soft top and set aside.

NOTE: Be sure the wire harness is not attached to thesoft top bows before you lift the top.

8. Lift the soft top fabric up and away from the plasticheader with latches.

9. Pull all of the soft top fabric toward the rear of thevehicle and wrap around the plastic header.

10. Pull the soft top fabric around the ends of the plasticheader so that the fabric has a tight, smooth appearance.

11. Working from the rear of the vehicle with the tailgateopen, lift the plastic header up and over the sport bar. Asthe header reaches the top, locate the 2 bow and push itup and over the sport bar.

70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 71: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

12. Move to the side of the vehicle and pull the side bowforward and down. You will see the 3 bow rise from therear of the vehicle.

13. Unclip and move the sun visor to the side.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71

3

Information Provided by:

Page 72: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

14. Open the header latches and engage the hooks oneach side into the windshield slot.

NOTE: Do not latch at this time.

15. Grasp the drip rail retainers and untuck them fromthe door frame. The soft top fabric should cover theheader completely from one side to the other. This mayrequire you to pull some of the fabric down and aroundthe corners. Repeat this step for the other side.

NOTE: Do not tuck the drip rail retainers into the frameat this time.

72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 73: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

16. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sailpanels over the 3 bow. Let them hang down over thesport bar. Make sure that the nylon check straps betweenthe 2 bow and 3 bow are not twisted or wrapped aroundthe 2 bow.

NOTE: Do not tuck the sail panel retainers at this time.

17. Fold the rear seat back and sit in the rear cargo area,facing rearward. Look up at the 2 bow. Wrap fabricaround 2 bow attaching it with the Velcrot. Look up atthe 3 bow and locate the 4 snaps on the rear side of the 3bow. Grasp the fabric rearward of the 3 bow (fabriccontains the snaps) and pull it up and around, attachingall 4 snaps. Return the rear seat to it’s original position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73

3

Information Provided by:

Page 74: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

18. Begin working from the rear tailgate opening andalign the sail panel retainer to the edge of the body sideretainer. Tuck the retainer around the corner workingfrom back to front.

NOTE: This may be difficult to do the first time. Thefabric will stretch after the soft top is installed in the upposition.

19. To install the quarter window, affix the rear corner ofthe quarter window temporarily to the Velcrot in the rearof the vehicle. Now, zip the zipper only about 1 inch (2.5cm). At this time, it is necessary to tuck in the door frameretainer into the door frame. After the door frame retainerhas been tucked in completely, remove the window fromthe Velcrot and finish zipping in the window. Tuck andfold the Velcrot flaps which are above and to the rear ofthe quarter windows. Repeat this step for the other side.

74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 75: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

20. Tuck in the bottom retainers on the quarter windowsinto the bodyside retainer, beginning from the rear andworking to the front of the vehicle. Repeat this step forthe other side.

21. Locate the black retainer bar that was set aside.Remove and discard the end caps. Slide the retainer barover the receiver at the bottom inside, with the bulky sealaway from you.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75

3

Information Provided by:

Page 76: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

22. Zip the rear window beginning from the left usingboth zipper ends. Leave one zipper end at the start.

23. Tuck in the retainer bar ends into the tailgate clips oneach side of the tailgate opening. 22

76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 77: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

24. Tuck in the plastic retainers on each side of the rearwindow under the tailgate clips.

25. Tuck in the drip rail retainers into the rail slot.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77

3

Information Provided by:

Page 78: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

26. Close the header latches and position the sun visor. HARD TOP

CAUTION!

• The hard top is not designed to carry any addi-tional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, build-ing, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or lug-gage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a structuralmember of the vehicle, and thus cannot properlycarry any additional loads other than environmen-tal (rain, snow, etc.).

• The hard top does not include any devices toproperly secure any loads on the roof, and anydamage (structural or surface finish) that occursdue to any additional loading to the top area willvoid the vehicle warranty.

78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 79: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CAUTION!

Do not move your vehicle until the top has beeneither fully attached to the windshield frame andbodyside, or fully removed.

Hard Top Removal

1. Fold down the sun visors and move them to the side.

2. Unlatch the two hard top latches located at the top ofthe windshield.

3. Unbolt the six Torxt head screws which secure thehard top to the vehicle using a #40 Torxt head driver.

CAUTION!

When removing the 2 front screws just rearward ofthe doors, make sure that the nut does not fall intothe seat belt retractor. Grasp the nut to prevent thisfrom occurring.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79

3

Information Provided by:

Page 80: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: On a dual top vehicle, the two rear and centernuts are retained onto the bodyside.

4. Open both doors.

5. Open tailgate all the way to ensure clearance of therear window glass. Lift rear window glass.

6. Locate the wiring harness at the rear left side corner ofthe vehicle.

80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 81: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

7. Disconnect the washer hose and install the tetheredcap.

CAUTION!

Make sure storage cap is installed to prevent foreignmaterials from entering tube and clogging system.

8. Disconnect the wire harness from the hard top bypressing the tab at the side of the connector and pullingto disconnect.

NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, pushthe red latch to the right until you can only see the latchon one end (right) of the connector. This will unlockconnector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down andenabling the harness to be disconnected from the hardtop.

9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.

10. Fold the harness back and secure it to the mainharness using the attached Velcrot strap, to prevent theharness from rattling.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81

3

Information Provided by:

Page 82: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: If the doors are to be removed, pull the #4 fusefrom the fuse block to prevent dome lamp illumination.

Hard Top Installation

NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft topusage, they must be removed prior to installation of thehard top.

1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace ifnecessary.

2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removalin reverse order.

NOTE: The hard top must be positioned properly toensure sealing. Set the hard top on the windshield frameso that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that thehard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides andcheck to ensure that there is a uniform gap between thelift glass and hard top.

SOFT TOP

CAUTION!

• The soft top is not designed to carry any addi-tional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, build-ing, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or lug-gage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a structuralmember of the vehicle, and thus cannot properlycarry any additional loads other than environmen-tal (rain, snow, etc.).

• The soft top does not include any devices toproperly secure any loads on the roof, and anydamage (structural or surface finish) that occursdue to any additional loading to the top area willvoid any vehicle warranty.

82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 83: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the tophas been folded down for a period of time, the top willappear to have shrunk when you raise it, making itdifficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contractionof the vinyl coating on the fabric top.

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the topfabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size andthe top can then be snapped into place. If temperature is41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top downor roll the rear or side curtains.

CAUTION!

• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic carwash. Window scratches and wax build up mayresult.

• Do not lower the top when the temperature isbelow 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.

• Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty.Grit may scratch the window.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top has beeneither fully attached to the windshield frame, orfully lowered.

• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.Window and top damage may occur.

• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Mod-els” in Section 7 of this manual. It containsimportant information on cleaning and caring foryour vehicle’s fabric top.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83

3

Information Provided by:

Page 84: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain upunless side curtains are also open. Dangerousexhaust gases which can kill could enter thevehicle.

• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are de-signed only for protection against the elements.Do not rely on them to contain occupants withinthe vehicle or to protect against injury during anaccident. Remember, always wear seat belts.

Folding Down The Soft Top

1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half doorwindow by opening the door and lifting the half doorwindow out.

NOTE: Stow half doors carefully outside of the vehicle,never inside to avoid scratches.

84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 85: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

2. Grasp the drip rail retainers and untuck both of themfrom the door frame slot. Repeat this on the other side.

3. Unclip and move the sun visor to the side.

4. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in thewindshield slots.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85

3

Information Provided by:

Page 86: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

5. Open the tailgate, partially unzip the rear window oneach side, and unlock the rear window retainers.

NOTE: If zippers are difficult to operate due to roaddust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and asmall brush. Cleaning products are available throughMopart distributors.

6. Pull the retainer bar straight out from the tailgate clips.

• Remove the rear window entirely. This is done byunzipping the window bringing the right zipper taball the way to the end of the zipper track at thebottom left corner. Stow the windows carefully toavoid scratching, pull up on the window to disen-gage zipper end.

86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 87: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

7. Beginning from the rear, moving forward, partiallyunzip the side window and untuck the bottom retainers.

8. Finish unzipping the window and repeat this step onthe other side.

NOTE: Stow clean windows carefully outside of thevehicle to avoid scratches.

9. Untuck the sail panels from the bodyside.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

3

Information Provided by:

Page 88: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

10. Remove Sunrider™ pins to release side rails frombrackets located on both door rails (Unlimited ModelsOnly).

11. Release the hook portion of the latches. Grasp theside bow behind the header and lift the top back.

12. As you begin to lower the top, wrap the sail panels sothat they rest on the roof of the vehicle.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top,ensure that the hard top wire harness is folded back andsecured to the main harness, using the attached Velcrotstrap, to prevent connector damage.

13. Make sure the sides of the top are folded inward asthe top continues to fold, and that the check straps areclear of the vehicle.

88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 89: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Tuck the top between the 2 bow and the 3 bow as it folds. 14. Tuck the top between the 2 bow and the header.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89

3

Information Provided by:

Page 90: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

15. After the top is folded down, ensure that the drip railretainers are tucked in inward as shown. This is to avoidunnecessary wear to the fabric.

16. After the top is folded down, the check straps mustbe wrapped around the header. This will keep them fromhanging and flapping outside the vehicle.

90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 91: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Putting Up The Soft Top

NOTE: Be sure the wire harness is not attached to thesoft top bows before you lift the top.

1. Slide Sunrider sleeve towards header to cover Sun-rider link (Unlimited Models Only).

2. Begin working from the rear of the vehicle, with thetailgate open. Lift the plastic header (with latches) up andover the sport bar. As the header reaches the top, locatethe 2 bow and push it up and over the sport bar.

3. Move to the side of the vehicle and pull the side bowforward and down. Be sure the check straps are nottangled around the 2 bow. You will see the 3 bow risefrom the rear of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91

3

Information Provided by:

Page 92: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

4. Unclip and move the sun visor to the side. 5. Open the header latches and engage the hook on eachside into the windshield slot.

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 93: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

6. Guide side bows down into bracket on door rails.Make sure door rail Sunrider pins engage into bracket onside bows (Unlimited Models Only).

7. Grasp the drip rail retainer and untuck them from thedoor frame.

NOTE: Do not tuck the drip rails into the door frame atthis time.

8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sailpanels over the 3 bow. Let them hang down over thesport bar.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

3

Information Provided by:

Page 94: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

9. Tuck the sail panel retainer into the bodyside retainer.Begin working from the rear tailgate opening and workto the corner.

NOTE: This may be difficult to do the first time. Ifdifficulty is experienced with fabric tension, place yourhand on top of the 3 bow and push down to help tuck inthe sail panels.

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 95: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

10. To install the quarter windows, affix the rear cornerof the window temporarily. Now, zip the zipper onlyabout 1 inch (2.5 cm). At this time it is necessary to tuckin the door frame retainer.

11. After the door frame retainer has been completelytucked in, finish zipping in the window. Then affix theVelcrot flaps around the window.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

3

Information Provided by:

Page 96: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

12. Tuck the bottom retainers on the quarter window intothe bodyside retainer, beginning from the rear and work-ing to the front of the vehicle. Repeat this step for theother side.

13. Zip in rear window beginning from the left usingboth zipper ends. Leave one zipper end at the start.

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 97: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

14. To assist in getting the zipper started, lay the bar onthe inside of the wheel wells and uninstall half of theD-pillar retainer from U-rail to expose zipper ends.

15. Tuck the retainer bar into the tailgate clip.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

3

Information Provided by:

Page 98: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

16. Tuck in the solid plastic retainers on each side of thetailgate under the tailgate clip.

17. Tuck in drip rail retainers into the door frame slots.

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 99: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

18. Close the header latches and return the sun visor toit’s original position.

SUNRIDER™ — IF EQUIPPED (UNLIMITEDMODELS ONLY)

To Raise

1. Grasp the drip rail retainers and untuck both of themfrom the door frame slot. Repeat this on the other side.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

3

Information Provided by:

Page 100: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

3. Release the header latches, and slide the plastic sleevesforward.

4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure thematerial is folded back as shown. Secure latches to plasticretainer on header. Locate strap to secure the header tothe sport bar. Wrap strap around sport bar and hook toheader and tighten.

5. Attach and reposition sunvisors.

To Lower

1. Remove strap from header and sport bar.

2. Release header latches from header retainer.

3. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

4. Grasp the front header and pull to the front of thevehicle.

5. Slide plastic sleeve rearward over Sunrider™ link.

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 101: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

6. Tuck drip rail retainers into the door frame slots.

7. Close the header latches, and return sun visors to theiroriginal position.

DOOR FRAME

WARNING!

Do not drive your vehicle on-pavement with thedoor frame removed or the windshield down as youlose the protection these structural elements canprovide. These two procedures are furnished for useduring off-road operation only.

Door Frame Removal

1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachmentknobs. Place one hand in the upper rear and one hand onthe upper front of the door frame. Pull the frame towardsyou with your rearward hand to remove the frame fromthe vehicle.

2. Fold the door frames and store the knobs and doorframes outside of the vehicle. Repeat this step for theother side.

WARNING!

• Use both hands to remove the door frames. Thedoor frames will fold and could cause injury ifboth hands are not used.

• Never store the door frames in your vehicle. In anevent of an accident, a loose door frame manycause personal injury. If removed, always storethe door frames outside of the vehicle.

Door Frame Installation

1. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the bodyside, just behind the door opening.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

3

Information Provided by:

Page 102: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

2. Insert the top front of the door frame into the openingat the top corner of the door opening. Push the top rear ofthe door frame to the side bar.

3. Slide door frame forward until the pin holes in the topline up with the holes in the side bar. Screw in the knobsand tighten, beginning with the front knob. Repeatprocedures on the other side.

FOLDING WINDSHIELDThe fold down windshield and removable side bars onyour vehicle are structural elements that can providesome protection in some accidents. The windshield alsoprovides some protection against weather, road debrisand intrusion of small branches and other objects.

Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshielddown and the side bars removed as you lose the protec-tion these structural elements can provide.

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 103: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: Before lowering windshield, disconnect theelectrical connector for the inside Compass/Temperaturemirror (if equipped).

If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can beremoved and the windshield folded down. However, theprotection afforded by these features is then lost. If youremove the side bars and fold down the windshield,drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that thespeed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), withlow range operation preferred, if you are driving off-roadwith the windshield folded down.

Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon asthe task that required their removal is completed andbefore you return to on-road driving. Both you and yourpassenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road andoff-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raisedor folded down.

Outside rear view mirrors are mounted on the doors. Ifyou choose to remove the doors, see your authorizeddealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror.Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles foron-road use.

NOTE: If the doors are removed, the courtesy lightswill remain on. To turn these lights off, remove fuse #4 inthe fuse panel. Refer to “Fuse Panel” in Section 7 of thismanual.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

3

Information Provided by:

Page 104: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Carefully follow these warnings to help protectagainst personal injury:

• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the wind-shield down.

• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield issecurely fastened, either up or down.

• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn atall times when the windshield is down.

• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructionsfor raising the windshield. Make sure that thefolding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars,and all associated hardware and fasteners arecorrectly and tightly assembled before drivingyour vehicle. Failure to follow these instructionsmay prevent your vehicle from providing you andyour passengers protection in some accidents.

• If you remove the doors, store them outside thevehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose doormay cause personal injury.

Lowering the Windshield and Removing SideBars

1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top followingthe instructions in this manual.

2. Remove the sun visors, if desired. Store the sun visors.

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 105: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

3. Remove the two Torxt head screws holding each sidebar to the windshield frame. Shift the side bar inboard toclear windshield pillar molding when removing the sidebar.

NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their originalthreaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.

4. Unzip the sport bar padding to expose the side barbolts. Remove the two front and rear Torxt head screwsfor each bar. Remove the side bars and rezip sport barpadding in place.

Do not loosen or remove the adjusting bolts on the sideof the side bars. These bolts are set at the factory toproperly fit the side bar to the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Do not remove the head impact foam from the sidebars, as damage to the foam may result.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

3

Information Provided by:

Page 106: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

5. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four ofthe cinch straps, found in the glove box. Attach the strapsthrough the footman loops located in the floor behind thefolded rear seat on each side of the vehicle.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you carry the sidebars loose in your vehicle. Remove the bars from thevehicle or securely store them as described or theymay cause personal injury if an accident occurs. Seeyour authorized dealer for replacement if the cinchstraps are not found in the glove box.

6. Remove the windshield wipers by first pulling thewiper away from the windshield and out to the “lock”position. Then, using a small flat tool such as a screwdriver, release the retaining clip. Lift the wipers off andstore in center console or securely behind the rear seat.

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 107: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

7. Remove the black round headed windshield Torxthead screw on each side of the base of the windshield.

8. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts therubber hood bumpers.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

3

Information Provided by:

Page 108: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

9. Secure the windshield by passing the remaining cinchstrap, found in the glove box, through the footman hoopon the center of the hood and on the center of thewindshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure the wind-shield in place.

Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side BarsTo raise the windshield, install the windshield wipers,and install the side bars use these same steps in reverse.

WARNING!

To help protect against personal injury, always in-stall the side bars when raising the windshield onyour vehicle. If you do not raise the windshield andinstall the side bars, you lose the protection thesestructural elements provide in some accidents.

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 109: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

m Instrument Panel And Interior Controls . . . . . . 114

m Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

m Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

m Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

m Sales Code RAD—AM & FM Stereo RadioWith Graphic Equalizer, Cassette Tape PlayerWith CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

▫ Radio Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 122

▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ AM/FM-Tape/CD/CD-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4

Information Provided by:

Page 110: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

▫ To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory . . . . . . 123

▫ Operating Instructions - RDS Mode . . . . . . . . 124

▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

▫ TA (Traffic Announcement) Button . . . . . . . . . 125

▫ PTY (Program Type) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

▫ AF LOC (Alternative Frequencies And LocalFrequencies) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

▫ Operating Instructions - Tape Mode . . . . . . . . 126

▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Tape Eject D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Metal Tape Selection (70µs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Dolby Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ FF/Tune/RW Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ CD/CD—C/Tape Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

m Sales Code RBB—AM/FM Stereo RadioWith Cassette Tape Player And CD ChangerCapability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Electronic Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

110 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 111: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

▫ To Set The Push-Button Memory . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Bass And Treble Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ AM/FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Cassette Player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ CD Changer Control Capability —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

▫ Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

m Sales Code RBK—AM/ FM Stereo RadioWith CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . 135

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ CD Changer Control Capability —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

▫ Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

m Sales Code RBT/RBY—AM Stereo & FM StereoRadio With Graphic Equalizer, Cassette TapePlayer And CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 140

▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

▫ Seek (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ AM/FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory . . . . . . 141

▫ Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

▫ Operating Instructions - Tape Mode . . . . . . . . 142

▫ (¹D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

▫ Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111

4

Information Provided by:

Page 112: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

▫ Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ EJT Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Metal Tape Selection (70µs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Dolby Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 144

▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ EJT CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ FF/Tune/RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ RND (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ CD/CD-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

m Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB AndRBK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU,RAZ, And RBQ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 147

▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

112 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 113: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

m Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 148

m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 149

m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫ Heater Only — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Air Conditioning — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

m Rear Window Features — Hard Top Only . . . . 154

▫ Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113

4

Information Provided by:

Page 114: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INTERIOR CONTROLS

114 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 115: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115

4

Information Provided by:

Page 116: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONYour vehicle is equipped with the instrument clusterdescribed on the following pages.

1. VoltmeterIndicates available battery voltage and chargingsystem operation. The lower red zone indicates

that battery charge may be too low to start the engine.With the engine running, the normal operating rangeis between 11 and 15 volts. Prolonged gauge readingsbetween 8-11 (undercharge) or above 15 (overcharge)indicate possible malfunction of generator, voltageregulator or battery. See your dealer if such indicationsoccur.

2. Front Fog Light Indicator Light — If EquippedThis light shows when the front fog lights areon.

3. Cruise Indicator LightThis light shows when the electronic speedcontrol system is turned on.

4. Sentry Key Indicator Light — If EquippedRefer to “Sentry Key Immobilizer System” inSection 2 of this manual.

5. TachometerIndicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute(RPM).

CAUTION!

Do not operate the engine with the tachometerpointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.

6. Turn Signal Indicator LightsThe arrows will flash with the exterior turn sig-nals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone

will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than1 mile (2 km).

116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 117: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

7. High Beam Indicator LightThis light shows that the headlights are on highbeam. Pull the turn signal lever towards the

steering wheel to switch the headlights from high orlow. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights orparklights are left on, the “High Beam Indicator Light”will flash and a chime will sound.

8. Seat Belt Indicator LightA warning chime and an indicator light willalert you to buckle the seat belts. When the beltis buckled, the chime will stop, but the light will

stay on until it times out (about 6 seconds).

9. SpeedometerIndicates vehicle speed.

10. Front Axle Lock Indicator Light — If EquippedIndicates when the front axle lock has beenactivated.

11. Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — If EquippedIndicates when the rear axle lock has beenactivated.

12. 4WD Indicator LightThis light alerts the driver that the vehicle isin the four-wheel drive mode, and the frontand rear driveshafts are mechanically lockedtogether forcing the front and rear wheels to

rotate at the same speed.

13. Shift Indicator Light — If EquippedThis light shows the driver when to shift to thenext higher gear for best fuel economy (4.0L

Only).

14. Oil Pressure GaugeIndicates engine oil pressure. This gauge doesnot indicate oil level, and pressure varies with

engine speed, temperature and oil viscosity. Consis-tent lower readings indicate possible malfunction.Seek authorized service.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117

4

Information Provided by:

Page 118: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

15. Coolant Temperature GaugeIndicates engine coolant temperature. The redzone to the far right indicates possible overheat-ing. Seek authorized service immediately if the

gauge operates in the red zone. In U.S. vehicles,temperature is indicated in degrees fahrenheit; inCanadian vehicles in degrees centigrade.

16. Airbag Warning LightThis indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to8 seconds when the ignition is first turnedon. If the light does not come on for 6 to 8seconds, stays on or comes on while driving,

have the airbag system checked by an authorizeddealer.

17. Check Gauges Warning LightThis light monitors the engine coolant tem-perature, engine oil pressure, and voltagegauges. If it detects an extreme condition a

chime will sound and the light will come on. If thelight comes on, check the operation of these gauges fora malfunction condition.

18. Malfunction Indicator LightThis light is a part of an Onboard DiagnosticSystem called OBD II that monitors engine,and automatic transmission control systems.

The light will illuminate when the ignition is in theON position before engine start. If the bulb does notcome on when turning the key from OFF to ON, havethe condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,poor quality fuel, etc. may illuminate the light afterengine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the lightstays on through several typical driving styles. In mostsituations, the vehicle will drive normally and will notrequire towing.

When the engine is running, the “Malfunction IndicatorLight” may flash to alert serious conditions that couldlead to immediate loss of power or severe catalyticconverter damage. The vehicle should be serviced assoon as possible if this occurs.

118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 119: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

19. Trip Odometer ButtonPress and release this button to toggle between theodometer and trip odometer displays. This button is alsoused to reset the trip odometer to 0. While the display isshowing the trip odometer, press and hold the button forapproximately 2 seconds and the display will reset to 0.

20. Odometer/Trip OdometerThe odometer shows the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven.

The odometer will “illuminate” when the driver’s doorhas been opened, and will remain on for 20 seconds afterexiting the vehicle.

U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer ofvehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser thecorrect mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair orreplacement, be sure to keep a record of the readingbefore and after the service so the correct mileage can bedetermined.

The trip odometer shows individual mileage up to 999.9miles (1 600 km). To switch from odometer to tripodometer, press the trip odometer button.

21. Anti-Lock (ABS) Warning LightAfter ignition is turned on, illuminates to indi-cate function check at vehicle start-up. If light

remains on after start-up or comes on and stays on atroad speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detecteda malfunction or has become inoperative. The systemreverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.

If both the red BRAKE warning light and the amber ABSwarning light are on, see your dealer immediately. Referto “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this manual.

22. Brake Warning LightAfter ignition is turned on, illuminates to in-dicate function check at vehicle start-up. Indi-cates parking brake is applied. If the light stays

on when the parking brake is off, it indicates a possiblebrake system fluid leak or low pressure level, see yourauthorized dealer immediately.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119

4

Information Provided by:

Page 120: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is inmotion, the red BRAKE warning light will “flash” and achime will sound.

The operation of the BRAKE warning light can bechecked by turning the ignition switch from the OFFposition to the ON position. The light should illuminatefor approximately two seconds. The light should thenturn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brakefault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have thelight inspected by an authorized dealer.

23. Low Fuel Warning LightWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 2 U.S.Gallons (7.6L) this light will come on and remainon until fuel is added. The “Low Fuel Warning

Light” may turn on and off again, especially duringand after hard braking, accelerations, or turns. Thisoccurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank.

24. Fuel Cap IndicatorThis symbol indicates the side of the vehiclewhere the fuel cap is located.

25. Fuel GaugeThe pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank. Whenthe fuel gauge pointer initially moves to E, for yoursafety, approximately 2 U.S. Gallons (7.6L) of fuel remain.

NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, thefuel gauge, voltmeter, oil pressure and temperaturegauges may not show accurate readings. When theengine is not running, turn the ignition switch to ON toobtain accurate readings.

ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK

The clock and radio each use the display panel built intothe radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours andminutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON orACC position and the time button is pressed.

When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or whenthe radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping isaccurately maintained.

120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 121: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC positionand press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint penor similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)buttons on the radio.

2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to setminutes. The time setting will increase each time youpress a button.

RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio Broadcast SignalsYour new radio will provide excellent reception undermost operating conditions. Like any system, however, carradios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you tobelieve your sound system is malfunctioning. To helpyou understand and save you concern about these “ap-parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point ortwo about the transmission and reception of radio sig-nals.

Two Types of SignalsThere are two basic types of radio signals... AM orAmplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted soundcauses the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves tovary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which thefrequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.

Electrical DisturbancesRadio waves may pick up electrical disturbances duringtransmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,and thus remain a part of the AM reception. Theyinterfere very little with the frequency variations thatcarry the FM signal.

AM ReceptionAM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM receptioncan be disrupted by such things as lightning, power linesand neon signs.

FM ReceptionBecause FM transmission is based on frequency varia-tions, interference that consists of amplitude variationscan be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,which is the major feature of FM radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121

4

Information Provided by:

Page 122: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

SALES CODE RAD—AM & FM STEREO RADIOWITH GRAPHIC EQUALIZER, CASSETTE TAPEPLAYER WITH CD PLAYER

Radio Security CodeThis radio is equipped with an anti-theft feature whichrequires that a four digit code number be entered when-ever the power supply is interrupted (such as a discon-nected battery). The four digit code can be found on thelast page of this manual. Please remove this page fromthe manual and store it in a safe place outside of thevehicle.

To enter the code, turn the key to the ON or ACC positionand press the ON/VOL control. The word CODE willappear on the display. Enter your four digit code bypressing the appropriate preset buttons in sequence. Yourradio is now ready for basic operation.

If an invalid code is entered into the radio, the radio willallow two more attempts. After a third attempt of enter-ing an invalid code, the radio will go into a lockup mode.This is to prevent continuous attempts at entering thewrong code until the right code is found.

Once a radio is in this lockup mode, it must be in a statewhere battery is applied for approximately 30 minutes.During this time, if the radio is on, the display will show“WAIT”. After approximately 30 minutes, (radio on)radio will display “CODE” thereby again querying theoperator for the 4 digit anti-theft code.

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied throughthe ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC positionto operate the radio.

122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 123: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Power Switch, Volume ControlPress the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn thevolume control to the right to increase the volume.

Seek Button (Radio Mode)Press and release the Seek button to search for the nextstation in either the MW/LW or FM mode. Press the topof the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.The radio will remain tuned to the new station until youmake another selection. Holding the button in will by-pass stations without stopping until you release it.

TuningPress the TUNE control up or down to increase ordecrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,the radio will continue to tune until you release thebutton. The frequency will be displayed and continu-ously updated while the button is pressed.

BalanceThe Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust thebalance and push the button back in.

FadeThe Fade control provides for balance between the frontand rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.Adjust the balance and push the button back in.

Tone ControlSlide the Bass and/or Treble controls up or down toadjust the sound for the desired tone.

AM/FM-TAPE/CD/CD-CPress the top of this button to switch between MW, FM,and LW. Press the bottom of this button to switchbetween Tape, CD, and optional CD changer controloperation.

To Set The Radio Push-button MemoryYou can store a total of 10 FM, 5 MW and 5 LW stationsinto memory.

When you are receiving a FM station that you wish tocommit to push-button memory, press the SET button.SET 1 will appear in the radio display window. Select thepush button you wish to lock on this station and pressand release that button. If a button is not selected within

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123

4

Information Provided by:

Page 124: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station willcontinue to play, but will not be locked into push-buttonmemory.

You may add a second FM station to each push button byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET button twice and SET 2 will appear in the radiodisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in the FM mode. This allows for 10 FM stations tobe locked into push button memory. The stations storedin SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

When you are receiving the MW or LW station that youwish to commit to push-button memory, press SET 1button. SET 1 will appear in the radio display window.Select the push-button you wish to lock on this stationand press and release that button.

Operating Instructions - RDS ModeThe following RDS functions can be selected while inradio mode by pushing the appropriate button.

Time ButtonBriefly press the Time button to change the displaybetween radio frequency and time.

To set the “HOME CLK” use a ballpoint pen or similarobject to press the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on theradio, The time setting will increase each time you pressthe button. Press any other button to exit from the clocksetting mode.

Any time the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons are pressedwhen in the “RDS CLK” mode the clock will automati-cally switch to the “HOME CLK” mode and only thehome time will be set.

Pressing and holding the TIME button for 2 seconds willtoggle the clock between “RDS CLK” and “HOME CLK”.The display will indicate which clock is activated. The“RDS CLK” is only updated by the signal transmittedfrom a radio station with an RDS signal.

124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 125: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

TA (Traffic Announcement) ButtonPressing the TA button will enable the Traffic Informationsystem. If the current station does not have the TPfunction or is not a RDS station the radio will beep anddisplay “NO TA” and then go into the TA seek mode.During Tape/CD mode the TA will give priority to trafficannouncements from the last tuned TA station. TA modeis always off in the MW/LW mode.

During TA seek mode the radio display will flash “TASEEK”. If no TP station is found after one cycle of thesearch the radio will display “NO TA” and then turn theTA feature off.

PTY (Program Type) Button

• Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY modefor 10 seconds. If no action is taken during the 10second time out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing thePTY button within 10 seconds will allow the programformat type to be selected. Toggle the PTY button toselect the following format types:

• None

• Affairs

• Children

• Classics

• Country

• Culture

• Document

• Drama

• Easy M

• Educate

• Finance

• Folk M

• Info

• Jazz

• Leisure

• Light M

• Nation M

• News

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125

4

Information Provided by:

Page 126: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Oldies

• Other M

• Phone In

• Pop M

• Religion

• Rock M

• Science

• Social

• Sport

• Travel

• Varied

• Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon isdisplayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequencystation with the same selected PTY name. The PTYfunction only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (ProgramType) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radiowill tune to the preset station.

AF LOC (Alternative Frequencies and LocalFrequencies) ButtonPressing the AF LOC button will toggle the radio displayas follows: LOC ON »» AF OFF »» LOC OFF. The radiodisplay will indicate when the LOC and AF are activated.

AF will automatically tune to another frequency of thesame national program when the signal quality of thecurrently tuned frequency becomes poor.

LOC limits AF to only tune to another station within thesame region code to ensure the program remains local.

Operating Instructions - Tape ModeInsert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward theright and the mechanical action of the player will gentlypull the cassette into the play position.

126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 127: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warmup for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback maybe experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean anddemagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.

Changing Tape DirectionPress the top of the PTY button to change tape playdirection. The display will confirm the selected tape playdirection. The time is always displayed.

Seek ButtonPress the SEEK button up for the next selection on thetape and down to return to the beginning of the currentselection.

Press the SEEK button up or down to move the tracknumber to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice tomove 2 selections, etc. the display will show the totalnumber of times the SEEK button was pushed. The SEEKfunction will be cancelled by pressing either the FF/RWor FM/MW/LW button.

Fast Forward (FF)Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tapein the direction that it is playing. The tape will advanceuntil the button is pressed again or the end of the tape isreached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in theopposite direction.

Rewind (RW)Press the RW button down momentarily to reverse thetape direction. The tape will reverse until the button ispressed again or until the end of the tape is reached. Atthe end of the tape, the tape will play in the oppositedirection.

Tape Eject DPress the Eject Tape button and the cassette will disen-gage and eject from the radio.

Metal Tape Selection (70µs)If a standard 70 µ (metal) tape is inserted into the player,the player will automatically select the correct equaliza-tion.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127

4

Information Provided by:

Page 128: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Pinch Roller ReleaseIf ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turnedoff, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protectthe tape from any damage. When power is restored to thetape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengageand the tape will resume play.

Dolby Noise ReductionThe Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on when-ever the tape player is on, but may be switched

on/off.

To turn the Dolby Noise reduction System on/off: Pressthe Dolby NR button (button 2) after you insert the tape.The NR light in the display will go off when the DolbySystem is off.

* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyand the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-ratories Licensing Corporation.

Operation Instructions — CD Player

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition and the volume control ON before the CD playerwill operate.

Inserting The Compact DiscYou may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioOFF, the time of day will be displayed.

If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch fromradio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert thedisc. The display will show the track number and indextime in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the startof track 1.

Seek ButtonPress the top of the SEEK button for the next selection onthe CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to thebeginning of the current selection, or return to thebeginning of the previous selection if the CD is within thefirst 10 seconds of the current selection.

128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 129: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

EJT CD (Eject) ButtonPress the EJT CD button and the disc will unload andmove to the entrance for easy removal. The unit willswitch to the radio mode. If you do not remove the discwithin 15 seconds, it will be reloaded, and the displaywill remain unchanged in whatever mode it is in.

FF/TUNE/RW ButtonPress FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin tofast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)button works in a similar manner.

Program Button 4 (Random Play)Press this button while the CD is playing to activateRandom Play. This feature plays the selections on thecompact disc in random order to provide an interestingchange of pace.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomlyselected track.

Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.

CD/CD—C/Tape ButtonPress this button to select between CD player, Remote CDchanger, and Tape player.

Time ButtonPress this button to change the display from elapsed CDplaying time to time of day.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129

4

Information Provided by:

Page 130: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIOWITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CDCHANGER CAPABILITY

Operating Instructions

NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied throughthe ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC positionto operate the radio.

NOTE: When first learning the control functions, theuser should set the controls as shown in the followinglist.Tone Controls…As illustrated.Speaker Control…Centered.

Power ButtonThe volume control/power button pops out whenpressed, this turns the sound system ON in the mode lastused. Pushing the button back in turns the sound systemOFF.

Electronic Volume ControlThe electronic volume control turns continuously (360degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning thevolume control to the right increases the volume and tothe left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will beset at the same volume level as last played.

For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignitionis ON.

SeekPress and release the SEEK button to search for the nextstation in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of thebutton to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Theradio will remain tuned to the new station until you

130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 131: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

make another selection. Holding the button will bypassstations without stopping until you release it.

TunePress the TUNE control up or down to increase ordecrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,the radio will continue to tune until the button isreleased. The frequency will be displayed and continu-ously updated while the button is pushed.

To Set The Push-Button MemoryWhen you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to push-button memory, press the SET button.The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this stationand press and release that button. If a button is notselected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,the station will continue to play but will not be lockedinto push-button memory.

You may add a second station to each push-button byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the displaywindow. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 inboth AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM

stations to be locked into push-button memory. Thestations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bypressing the push-button twice.

Every time a preset button is used a correspondingbutton number will be displayed.

BalanceThe balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjustthe balance and push the button back in.

FadeThe fade control provides for balance between the frontand rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it willpop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.

Bass and Treble Tone ControlThe tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bassband is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent atthe mid-position. Moving the control up or down in-creases or decreases amplification of that band. The midposition provides a balanced output.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131

4

Information Provided by:

Page 132: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

AM/FM SelectionPress the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. Theoperating mode will be displayed next to the stationfrequency. The display will show ST when a stereostation is received in the FM mode.

Mode ButtonPress the MODE button to select between the cassettetape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (ifequipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) isselected “SA” will appear in your radio display.

A CD or tape may remain in the player while in theSatellite or radio mode.

Cassette Player FeaturesWith ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you caneject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button.

You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette oractivating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),but only when the ignition and radio are on.

Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will beginplaying on the side of the cassette that is facing up in theplayer.

Music SearchPressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will startthe Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for thenext selection on the tape and down to return to thebeginning of the current selection, or return to thebeginning of the previous selection if the tape is withinthe first 5 seconds of the current selection.

The SEEK symbol appears on the display when MusicSearch is in operation. Music Search shuts off automati-cally when a selection has been located.

Selective Music SearchPress the SEEK button up or down to move the tracknumber to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice tomove 2 selections, etc.

Fast Forward And Rewind ButtonsPressing the TUNE button up or down momentarilyactivates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the direc-tional arrows appear on the display.

To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE buttonagain.

132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 133: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Time ButtonPress the time button to toggle between station frequencyand time of day.

Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape willchange the side of the tape being played.

NR (Noise Reduction)Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape isplaying deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on thedisplay. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turnON.

* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyand the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-ratories Licensing Corporation.

CD Changer Control Capability — If EquippedThis radio is compatible with a remote mounted CDchanger available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operatethis CD changer.

Mode ButtonTo activate the CD changer, press the MODE button untilCD information appears on the display.

Push-ButtonWhile the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select adisc numbered higher or lower than the one currentlybeing played.

Seek ButtonPress the SEEK up or down to select another track on thesame disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.

Fast Forward And Rewind ButtonsPress and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press andhold the RW button for fast reverse.

The audio output can be heard when fast forward andfast reverse are activated.

Random Play (RND)Press the Random button to play the tracks on theselected disc in random order for an interesting change ofpace.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133

4

Information Provided by:

Page 134: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a secondtime or by ejecting the CD from the changer.

CD Diagnostic IndicatorsWhen driving over a very rough road, the CD player mayskip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc orthe player, and play will resume automatically.

As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of thefollowing warning symbols may appear on your display.

A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.

CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumedwhen the operating temperature is corrected or anotherMODE is selected.

An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser isunable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:

• Excessive vibration

• Disc inserted upside down

• Damaged disc

• Water condensation on optics

Radio Display MessagesYour radio has been designed to display certain messageswhen a problem is detected with the CD player.

134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 135: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIOWITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGERCONTROLS

Radio Operation

Power/Volume ControlPress the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn thevolume control clockwise to increase the volume.

NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied throughthe ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC positionto operate the radio.

SeekPress and release the SEEK button to search for the nextstation in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of thebutton to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Theradio will remain tuned to the new station until youmake another selection. Holding the button in will by-pass stations without stopping until you release it.

TunePress the TUNE control up or down to increase ordecrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,the radio will continue to tune until you release thebutton. The frequency will be displayed and continu-ously updated while the button is pressed.

BalanceThe Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjustthe balance and push the button back in.

FadeThe Fade control provides for balance between the frontand rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it willpop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135

4

Information Provided by:

Page 136: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Bass and Treble Tone ControlThe tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bassband is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent atthe mid-position. Moving the control up or down in-creases or decreases amplification of that band. The midposition provides a balanced output.

AM/FM SelectionPress the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. Theoperating mode will be displayed next to the stationfrequency. The display will show ST when a stereostation is received.

To Set The Radio Push-Button MemoryWhen you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to push-button memory, press the SET button.SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”button you wish to lock onto this station and press andrelease that button. If a button is not selected within 5seconds after pressing the SET button, the station willcontinue to play but will not be locked into push-buttonmemory.

You may add a second station to each push-button byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the displaywindow. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 inboth AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FMstations to be locked into push-button memory. Thestations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bypressing the push-button twice. Every time a presetbutton is used a corresponding button number will bedisplayed.

TimePress the TIME button to change the display betweenradio frequency and time.

General InformationThis radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference,

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 137: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-proved by the party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CD Player Operation

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition and the volume control ON before the CD playerwill operate.

Inserting The Compact Disc

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discsonly. The use of other sized discs may damage theCD player mechanism.

You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioOFF, the display will show the time of day.

If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CDmode and begin to play when you insert the disc. Thedisplay will show the track number and index time inminutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of trackone.

SeekPress the top of the SEEK button for the next selection onthe CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to thebeginning of the current selection, or return to thebeginning of the previous selection if the CD is within thefirst second of the current selection.

EJT — EjectPress the EJT button and the disc will unload and moveto the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch tothe radio mode.

If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will bereloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137

4

Information Provided by:

Page 138: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

FF/TUNE/RWPress FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin tofast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)button works in a similar manner.

Random Play — RND/Program Button 4Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playingto activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks onthe selected disc in random order to provide an interest-ing change of pace.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomlyselected track.

Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stopRandom Play.

ModePress the MODE button repeatedly to select between theCD player, the optional remote CD changer and theSatellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (ifequipped) is selected “SA” will appear in your radiodisplay.

A CD or tape may remain in the player while in theSatellite mode.

TimePress the TIME button to change the display fromelapsed CD playing time to time of day.

CD Changer Control Capability — If EquippedThis radio is compatible with a remote mounted CDchanger available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operatethis CD changer.

Mode ButtonTo activate the CD changer, press the MODE button untilCD information appears on the display.

Push-ButtonWhile the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select adisc numbered higher or lower than the one currentlybeing played.

Seek ButtonPress the SEEK up or down to select another track on thesame disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.

138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 139: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Fast Forward And Rewind ButtonsPress and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press andhold the RW button for fast reverse.

The audio output can be heard when fast forward andfast reverse are activated.

Random Play (RND)Press the Random button to play the tracks on theselected disc in random order for an interesting change ofpace.

Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a secondtime or by ejecting the CD from the changer.

CD Diagnostic IndicatorsWhen driving over a very rough road, the CD player mayskip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc orthe player, and play will resume automatically.

As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of thefollowing warning symbols may appear on your display.

A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.

CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumedwhen the operating temperature is corrected or anotherMODE is selected.

An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser isunable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:

• Excessive vibration

• Disc inserted upside down

• Damaged disc

• Water condensation on optics

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139

4

Information Provided by:

Page 140: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Radio Display MessagesYour radio has been designed to display certain messageswhen a problem is detected with the CD player.

SALES CODE RBT/RBY—AM STEREO & FMSTEREO RADIO WITH GRAPHIC EQUALIZER,CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD PLAYER

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied throughthe ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC positionto operate the radio.

Power Switch, Volume ControlPress the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn thevolume control to the right to increase the volume.

NOTE: The volume control knob will need to bepushed out for the ON position and in for the OFFposition.

140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 141: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Seek (Radio Mode)Press and release the SEEK button to search for the nextstation in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of thebutton to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Theradio will remain tuned to the new station until youmake another selection. Holding the button in will by-pass stations without stopping until you release it.

TunePress the TUNE control up or down to increase ordecrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,the radio will continue to tune until you release thebutton. The frequency will be displayed and continu-ously updated while the button is pressed.

BalanceThe Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust thebalance and push the button back in.

FadeThe Fade control provides for balance between the frontand rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.Adjust the balance and push the button back in.

Tone ControlSlide the Bass and/or Treble controls up or down toadjust the sound for the desired tone.

AM/FM SelectionPress the top of the AM/FM CD/CD-C button to switchbetween AM and FM.

To Set The Radio Push-Button MemoryWhen you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to push-button memory, press the SET button.SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the“1–5” button you wish to lock on this station and pressand release that button. If a button is not selected within5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station willcontinue to play but will not be locked into push-buttonmemory.

You may add a second station to each push-button byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET button twice and the symbol SET 2 will show inthe display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AMand 10 FM stations to be locked into push-button

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141

4

Information Provided by:

Page 142: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can beselected by pressing the push-button twice.

TimePress the TIME button to change the display betweenradio frequency and time.

To set the clock, use a ballpoint pen or similar object topress the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio,The time setting will increase each time you press thebutton. Press any other button to exit from the clocksetting mode.

Operating Instructions - Tape ModeInsert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward theright and the mechanical action of the player will gentlypull the cassette into the play position.

NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warmup for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback maybe experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean anddemagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.

(¹D)Pressing the (¹D) button during tape mode will cause theother side of the tape to be played. The display willconfirm the selected tape play direction. The time isalways displayed.

TapePress the TAPE button to select the Tape mode.

SeekPress the SEEK button up for the next selection on thetape and down to return to the beginning of the currentselection.

Press the SEEK button up or down to move the tracknumber to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice tomove 2 selections, etc. the display will show the totalnumber of times the SEEK button was pushed. The SEEKfunction will be cancelled by pressing either the FF/RWor AM/FM button.

142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 143: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Fast Forward (FF)Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tapein the direction that it is playing. The tape will advanceuntil the button is pressed again or the end of the tape isreached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in theopposite direction.

Rewind (RW)Press the RW button down momentarily to reverse thetape direction. The tape will reverse until the button ispressed again or until the end of the tape is reached. Atthe end of the tape, the tape will play in the currentdirection.

EJT TapePress the EJT TAPE button and the cassette will disen-gage and eject from the radio.

Metal Tape Selection (70µs)If a standard 70 µ (metal) tape is inserted into the player,the player will automatically select the correct equaliza-tion.

Pinch Roller ReleaseIf ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turnedoff, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protectthe tape from any damage. When power is restored to thetape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengageand the tape will resume play.

Dolby Noise ReductionThe Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on when-ever the tape player is on, but may be switched

on/off.

To turn the Dolby Noise Reduction System on/off: Pressthe Dolby NR button (button 2) after you insert the tape.The NR light in the display will go off when the DolbySystem is off.

* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyand the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-ratories Licensing Corporation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143

4

Information Provided by:

Page 144: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Operation Instructions — CD Player

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition and the volume control ON before the CD playerwill operate.

Inserting The Compact DiscYou may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioOFF, the disc icon will be displayed in addition to thetime of day.

If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch fromradio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert thedisc. The display will show the track number and indextime in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the startof track 1.

SeekPress the top of the SEEK button for the next selection onthe CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to thebeginning of the current selection, or return to thebeginning of the previous selection, if the CD is withinthe first second of the current selection.

EJT CDPress the EJT CD button and the disc will unload andmove to the entrance for easy removal. The unit willswitch to the radio mode.

If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will bereloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.

FF/TUNE/RWPress FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin tofast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)button works in a similar manner.

RND (Random Play)Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activateRandom Play. This feature plays the selections on thecompact disc in random order to provide an interestingchange of pace.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomlyselected track.

Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks.

Press the RND button a second time to stop RandomPlay.

144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 145: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CD/CD-CPress the bottom of the AM/FM CD/CD-C button toswitch between the CD and CD changer (if equipped).

TimePress the TIME button to change the display fromelapsed CD playing time to time of day.

SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPEDSatellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast tocoast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

System ActivationTo activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call thetoll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web siteat www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-tion available when activating your system:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID).

2. Credit card information.

3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ENS/SID)The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radiosystem. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the followingsteps:

ESN/SID Access With RBB and RBK RadiosWith the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position andthe radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depend-ing on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneouslyfor 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digitESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UPbutton to display the next four digits. Continue to pressthe SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits havebeen displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down untilthe first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit theESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, theignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since anybutton was pushed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145

4

Information Provided by:

Page 146: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, and RBQRadiosWith the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position andthe radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttonssimultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SIDmode when any other button is pushed, the ignition isturned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any buttonwas pushed.

Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB and RBK RadiosPress the MODE button repeatedly until 9S A9 appears inthe display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio whilein the Satellite radio mode.

Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, andRBQ RadiosPress the MODE button repeatedly until the word9SIRIUS9 appears in the display. These radios will alsodisplay the following:

• After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channelnumber will be displayed for 5 seconds.

• The current program type and channel number willthen be displayed for 5 seconds.

• The current channel number will then be displayeduntil an action occurs.

A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in theSatellite radio mode.

Selecting a ChannelPress and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search forthe next channel. Press the top of the button to search upand the bottom of the button to search down. Holding theTUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels untilthe button is released.

Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) toautomatically change channels every 7 seconds. Theradio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds beforemoving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 willappear in the display between each channel change. Pressthe SCAN button a second time to stop the search.

146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 147: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable con-tent can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking orunblocking. Please have your ESN/SID informationavailable.

Storing and Selecting Pre-Set ChannelsIn addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, youmay also commit 10 satellite stations to push buttonmemory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will noterase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow thememory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.

Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (ifequipped)Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to yourradio.

PTY Button (SCAN(When the desired program type is obtained, press the9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7seconds of the selected channel before moving to the nextchannel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9button a second time to stop the search.

NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button whileperforming a music type scan will change the channel byone and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memorybutton during a music type scan, will call up the memorychannel and stop the search.

PTY Button (SEEK(When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9button within five seconds. The channel will change tothe next channel that matches the program type selected.

Satellite AntennaTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on theroof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objectsplaced within the line of sight of the antenna will causedecreased performance. Larger luggage items should beplaced as far forward as possible. Do not place itemsdirectly on or above the antenna.

Reception QualitySatellite reception may be interrupted due to one of thefollowing reasons.

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parkingstructure or under a physical obstacle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147

4

Information Provided by:

Page 148: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in theform of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings cancause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna cancause signal blockage.

CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCETo keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,take the following precautions:

1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-ished.

2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect fromslackness and dust when it is not in use.

3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heatand magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.

4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label isadhering flatly to the cassette.

5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewinda loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tapedrive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.

Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstanshaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tapedeposits each time a cassette is played. The result ofdeposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wraparound and become lodged in the tape transport. Theother adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound fromone or both channels, as if the treble tone control wereturned all the way down. To prevent this, you shouldperiodically clean the head with a commercially availableWET cleaning cassette.

As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes verydirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible toremove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.

148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 149: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCETo keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take thefollowing precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching thesurface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to thedisc; avoid scratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,or antistatic sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may becometoo high.

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONESUnder certain conditions, the cellular phone being On inyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance fromyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminatedby relocating the cellular phone antenna. This conditionis not harmful to the radio. If your radio performancedoes not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume beturned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLSThe controls for the heating and ventilation system in thisvehicle consist of three rotary control knobs. These com-fort controls can be set to obtain desired interior condi-tions.

NOTE: For the HVAC to operate efficiently and reducethe possibility of fog build up on the interior of thewindows, the air exhausters should be kept clear at alltimes. The air exhausters are the slots located on the reartailgate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149

4

Information Provided by:

Page 150: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Heater Only — If Equipped

In snowy weather, always clear the air inlet grille at thebase of the windshield before driving your vehicle.

Blower SwitchThe blower switch is the rotary knob to the left of thecontrols. The blower speed will increase as the knob

is turned clockwise. There are four blower speeds.

NOTE: The blower motor will run until the system isturned to the “Off” (“O”) position or the ignition isturned OFF.

Temperature ControlThe temperature control is the center knob located on theclimate controls. It controls the temperature of the airdelivered to the passenger compartment.

The “Blue” area on the left side of the control indicatescooler temperatures while the “Red” area indicateswarmer temperatures.

Mode SelectionThe mode selector is the right knob located on the climatecontrols. It can be set in any of the following positions:

OffThis position turns off the blower motor. In thismode, there may be some slight air flow from the

floor outlets, side window outlets, and defrost outletlocated at the base of the windshield.

PanelAir comes from the outlets in the instrumentpanel. Each of these outlets can be individually

adjusted to direct the flow of air. Also, a slight amountof airflow may be noticed at the defrost outlet locatedat the base of the windshield.

150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 151: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Bi-LevelAir comes from both instrument panel and flooroutlets. Also, a slight amount of airflow may be

noticed at the defrost outlet located at the base of thewindshield.

FloorAir comes from the floor outlets. Also, a slightamount of airflow may be noticed at the defrost

outlet located at the base of the windshield.

MixAir comes from the floor and defrost outlets withair being directed through the demisters. Thismode works best in cold or snowy conditions. It

allows you to stay comfortable while keeping thewindshield clear.

DefrostAir comes from the windshield outlets with aslight amount of air being directed through the

floor and demisters. Use this setting when necessaryto defrost or defog your windshield.

Air Conditioning — If Equipped

Blower SwitchThe blower switch is the rotary knob to the left of thecontrols. Turn the knob to the right to one of the four

positions to obtain the blower speed you desire.

NOTE: The blower motor will run until the system isturned to the “Off” (“O”) position or the ignition isturned OFF.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151

4

Information Provided by:

Page 152: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Temperature ControlThe temperature control is the center knob located on theclimate controls. It controls the temperature of the airdelivered to the passenger compartment.

The “Blue” area on the left side of the control indicatescooler temperatures while the “Red” area indicateswarmer temperatures.

Mode Selection

The mode selector is the right knob located on the climatecontrols. It can be set in any of the following positions:

OffTurning the rotary knob to this position shuts offthe blower motor and outside air will not come

through any outlet.

152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 153: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

RecirculationSelect this position when the outside air con-tains smoke, odors, high humidity, or if rapidcooling is desired. This feature allows for recir-

culation of interior air only. Air flows through thepanel outlets in this mode. Also, a slight amount ofairflow may be noticed at the defrost outlet located atthe base of the windshield.

PanelOutside air flows through the air conditioningsystem, and then through the outlets located inthe instrument panel. Also, a slight amount of

airflow may be noticed at the defrost outlet located atthe base of the windshield.

Bi-LevelOutside air flows through the air conditioningsystem, and then through the outlets located in

the instrument panel and those located on the floor.Also, a slight amount of airflow may be noticed at thedefrost outlet located at the base of the windshield.

PanelOutside air comes from the outlets in the instru-ment panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-

ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. Also, a slightamount of airflow may be noticed at the defrost outletlocated at the base of the windshield.

FloorOutside air comes from the floor outlets. Also, aslight amount of airflow may be noticed at the

defrost outlet located at the base of the windshield.

MixAir comes from the floor and defrost outlets. Thismode works best in cold or snowy conditions. Itallows you to stay comfortable while keeping the

windshield clear.

DefrostAir comes from the windshield outlets with asmall amount being directed through the floor

outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrostyour windshield.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153

4

Information Provided by:

Page 154: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: For improved safety, the A/C compressor isactivated when “Mix” or “Defrost” modes are selected.This is done to assist in drying the air and it will help inkeeping the windshield from fogging.

Operating Tips

Summer OperationThe engine cooling system in air conditioned vehiclesmust be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolantto provide proper corrosion protection and to protectagainst engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethyleneglycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended.

Winter OperationThe air from the heater system will heat faster in coldweather if you use lower blower speeds until the enginewarms up.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY

Rear Window DefoggerTo turn the rear window defogger on, press therocker switch. If you press the switch a second

time, you will turn the defogger off. A light on the rockerswitch will indicate the defogger is on.

The defogger will automatically turn off after about tenminutes. For five more minutes of operation, depress thetop of the switch to turn the defogger on again. Toprevent excessive battery drain use the defogger onlywhen the engine is operating.

154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Information Provided by:

Page 155: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CAUTION!

Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-dow to prevent damage to heating elements. Use asoft cloth and a mild washing solution, wipingparallel to the heating elements. Also, keep allobjects a safe distance from the window to preventdamaging the heating elements.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherTo utilize the rear wiper, press the switch to thefirst detent. To activate the rear washer, depress theswitch to the second detent. The washer will

continue to spray as long as the switch is held. The switchwill return to the wiper mode when released. To turn therear wiper off, lift the bottom of the switch.

Adding Washer FluidThe fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and therear window washer is shared. It is located in the front ofthe engine compartment on the passenger side andshould be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fillthe reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radia-tor antifreeze) and operate the system for a few secondsto flush out the residual water.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155

4

Information Provided by:

Page 156: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Information Provided by:

Page 157: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫ Extreme Cold Weather(Below –20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

m Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 162

m Transmission Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ 5-Speed Manual Overdrive Transmission . . . . . 163

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

m Four–Wheel Drive Operation (Command-Trac™Or Rock-Trac™) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

m Trac-Lok™ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

m Axle Lock (Tru–Lok™) — If Equipped . . . . . . 174

m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

m About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

m Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped . . . . . 179

m On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

5

Information Provided by:

Page 158: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

m Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

▫ When To Use Low Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

▫ In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 187

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 188

m Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

▫ High Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 196

m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

m Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

▫ Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

158 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 159: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Warranty Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

m Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

m Recreational Towing(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

▫ Shifting Into Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

▫ Shifting Out Of Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

STARTING AND OPERATING 159

5

Information Provided by:

Page 160: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

STARTING PROCEDURESBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust bothinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

Do not leave children or animals inside parkedvehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up maycause serious injury or death.

Manual TransmissionApply the parking brake, place the gearshift control leverin N (Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal beforestarting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutchinterlocking ignition system. It will not start unless theclutch pedal is pressed to the floor.

WARNING!

You or others around you could be injured if youattempt to start the engine with a manual transmis-sion in gear — your vehicle will move. Remember,always push the clutch pedal in fully and shift intoN (Neutral) before attempting to start the engine.

Automatic TransmissionStart the engine with the selector lever in the N (Neutral)or P (Park) position. Apply the brake before shifting toany driving range.

Normal StartingNormal starting of either a cold or a warm engine isobtained without pumping or depressing the acceleratorpedal. Turn the key to the START position and releasewhen the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.

160 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 161: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of anexternally powered electric engine block heater (availablefrom your dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails to StartIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and hold it there while cranking theengine. This should clear any excess fuel in case theengine is flooded.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank theengine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but nothave enough power to continue running when the key isreleased. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release theaccelerator pedal and the key once the engine is runningsmoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedalheld to the floor, the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme ColdWeather” procedures should be repeated.

STARTING AND OPERATING 161

5

Information Provided by:

Page 162: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into thethrottle body air inlet opening in an attempt to startthe vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causingserious personal injury.

After StartingThe idle speed will automatically decrease as the enginewarms up.

CAUTION!

Long periods of engine idling, especially at highengine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera-tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leaveyour vehicle unattended with the engine running.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms engine coolant andpermits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cordto a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with agrounded, three wire extension cord. The engine blockheater cord is found under the hood clipped to the tie rodbetween the radiator grille and the dash panel.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord couldcause electrocution.

Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) areexpected to last for several days.

162 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 163: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

TRANSMISSION SHIFTING

5-Speed Manual Overdrive TransmissionFollow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob.

NOTE: The backup lights will come on when yourvehicle is in reverse gear and the ignition is in the ONposition.

WARNING!

When parking your vehicle, always leave a manualtransmission in first gear and apply the parkingbrake fully to guard against vehicle movement andpossible injury or damage. Never use any gear as asubstitute for the parking brake.

CAUTION!

To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the lifeof your manual transmission, follow these tips:

• Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse, orfrom reverse to a forward gear, stop vehicle com-pletely. Otherwise, transmission damage may result.

• Do not operate at sustained high engine or roadspeeds in lower gears. Engine damage may result.

STARTING AND OPERATING 163

5

Information Provided by:

Page 164: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at toohigh a speed for that gear. Engine, clutch, or transmis-sion damage may result.

• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This causesheat buildup and damages the clutch.

• When you slow down or go up a grade, downshift asspeed requires or the engine may overheat.

• Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using theclutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged.

• During cold weather, you may experience increasedeffort in shifting until the transmission fluid warmsup. This is normal.

• Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting.Otherwise, transmission or clutch damage may result.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between aforward gear and reverse, do not spin wheels fasterthan 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage mayresult.

• The manual transmission may be equipped with a“Reverse Blocker” to prevent inadvertent shifts from5th gear to Reverse. If you experience difficulty shift-ing into “Reverse”, make sure that you are not inad-vertently moving the shift lever toward 5th gear whenshifting into “Reverse.”

Recommended Manual Transmission ShiftingSpeedsThe “Shift Indicator Light” in the instrument clusterreminds you when to shift to the next higher gear (4.0LOnly). The manufacturer recommends that you use theSIL for normal driving. The desired shift speeds are listedin the chart below.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 52.4L Accel. 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72)

Cruise 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72)4.0L Accel. 14 (23) 23 (37) 36 (58) 44 (71)

Cruise 14 (23) 20 (32) 28 (45) 38 (61)

164 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 165: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Clutch Interlocking Ignition SystemManual transmission vehicles are equipped with a clutchinterlock safety feature. With this feature engaged, youmust depress the clutch pedal to allow cranking of theengine. To temporarily bypass this safety feature whileoff-road driving, which will allow cranking the enginewithout depressing the clutch, follow these steps:

1. Locate the instrument panel fuseblock behind theglove compartment.

2. Put a 20 Amp fuse (optional) in the fuseblock cavity(f20) marked as Transmission.

NOTE: A fuse is provided in fuseblock cavity (f19)marked as Spare.

3. Be sure to re-engage the clutch interlock safety featureby following these steps in reverse order when you arefinished off-road driving.

Automatic TransmissionShifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (orfrom P or R to D) should be done only after theaccelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving theshift lever between these gears.

STARTING AND OPERATING 165

5

Information Provided by:

Page 166: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. Ifyour foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear whenthe engine is idling normally and when your rightfoot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Brake Transmission Shift Interlock SystemThis vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shiftinterlock system (BTSI) that holds the gearshift lever inthe P (Park) position when the ignition switch is in theOFF position. To move the gear selector lever out of theP (Park) position, the ignition switch must be turned tothe ON position, the brake pedal and the button on thefront of the shifter handle must be depressed.

Gear Ranges

P (Park)Supplements the parking brake by locking the trans-mission. The engine can be started in this range. Neveruse P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply theparking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.Always apply the parking brake first, and then placethe selector in P (Park) position.

166 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 167: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injurethose in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,you should never exit a vehicle while the engine isrunning. Before exiting a vehicle, you should alwaysshift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key fromthe ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once thekey is removed from the ignition, the transmissionshift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securingthe vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-more, you should never leave children unattendedinside a vehicle.

The following indicators should be used to ensure thatyou have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P(Park) position:

• When shifting into P (Park), depress the button on theshift lever and firmly move the lever all the wayforward until it stops.

• Look at the shift indicator window on the console toensure it is in the P (Park) position.

• When engaged in P (Park), you will not be able tomove the shifter rearward without depressing the shiftlever button.

CAUTION!

Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), youmust turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so thesteering wheel and shift lever are released. Other-wise, damage to the steering column or shifter couldresult.

R (Reverse)For moving the vehicle rearward. Always stop beforemoving the lever to R (Reverse), except when rockingthe vehicle.

N (Neutral)Engine may be started in this position.

STARTING AND OPERATING 167

5

Information Provided by:

Page 168: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off theignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafepractices that limit your response to changing trafficor road conditions. You might lose control of thevehicle.

Overdrive (O/D)For most city and highway driving. The transmissioncontains an electronically controlled Overdrive, andwill automatically shift from D (Drive) to O/D (Over-drive) if the following conditions are present:

• The transmission selector is in D (Drive).

• The O/D OFF switch has not been activated.

• Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48km/h).

When frequent transmission shifting occurs while usingOverdrive, such as when operating the vehicle underheavy load conditions (for example, in hilly terrain,

strong head winds, or trailer towing), turning off over-drive will improve performance and extend transmissionlife by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O/D OFFswitch located on the instrument panel. The O/D OFFindicator light (on the switch) will illuminate to showthat the switch has been activated. When the indicatorlight is on, Overdrive is locked out. Pressing the switch asecond time restores the Overdrive function. The lockoutfeature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying aheavy load.

168 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 169: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

2 (Second)For moderate grades and to assist braking on drypavement or in mud and snow. Begins at a stop in lowgear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear. Will not shiftto 3rd.

1 (First)For hard pulling at low speeds in mud, sand, snow, oron steep grades. Begins and stays in low gear with noupshift. Provides engine compression braking at lowspeeds.

WARNING!

Never use P (Park) position with an automatic trans-mission as a substitute for the parking brake. Al-ways apply parking brake fully when parked toguard against vehicle movement and possible injuryor damage.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), youmust turn the ignition from LOCK so the steeringwheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise,damage to steering column or shifter could result.

• Never race the engine with the brakes on and thevehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on anincline without applying the brakes. These prac-tices can overheat and damage the transmission.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-tween D (Drive) and R (Reverse), do not spin thewheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetraindamage may result.

STARTING AND OPERATING 169

5

Information Provided by:

Page 170: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Torque Converter ClutchA feature designed to improve fuel economy has beenadded to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. Aclutch within the torque converter engages automaticallyat calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-ent feeling or response during normal operation in highgear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.

FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION(COMMAND-TRAC™ OR ROCK-TRAC™) — IFEQUIPPED

Operating Instructions/PrecautionsThe transfer case provides four mode positions — two(rear) wheel drive high range, four wheel drive highrange, neutral, and four wheel drive low range.

This transfer case is intended to be driven in the twowheel drive (2H) position for normal street and highwayconditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.

In the events when additional traction is required, thetransfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock thefront and rear driveshafts together and force the frontand rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This isaccomplished by simply moving the shift lever to thesepositions. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4Lpositions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in-creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-nents.

The 4WD indicator light, located in the instrument panel,alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel driveand that the front and rear driveshafts are locked to-gether. This light illuminates when the transfer case isshifted to either the 4H or 4L positions.

170 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 171: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only thefront or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is notequipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front andrear driveshafts speeds must be equal for the shift to takeplace. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels arespinning can cause damage to the transfer case.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed isapproximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positionsat a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed theengine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends ontires of equal size, type, and circumference on eachwheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting andcause damage to the transfer case.

Because four wheel drive provides improved traction,there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stoppingspeeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave thevehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N(Neutral) position without first fully engaging theparking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) positiondisengages both the front and rear driveshafts fromthe powertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. The parkingbrake should always be applied when the driver isnot in the vehicle.

Shift Positions

For additional information on the appropriate use of eachtransfer case mode position, see the information below:

2H PositionRear Wheel Drive High Range — Normal street andhighway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.

STARTING AND OPERATING 171

5

Information Provided by:

Page 172: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

4H PositionFour Wheel Drive High Range — Locks the front and reardriveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,slippery road surfaces.

N (Neutral) PositionNeutral — Disengages both the front and rear driveshaftsfrom the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behindanother vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Sec-tion 5 of this manual.

4L PositionFour Wheel Drive Low Range — Locks the front and reardriveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maxi-mum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfacesonly. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Shifting Procedure

2H to 4H or 4H to 2HShifting between 2H and 4H can be made with thevehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With thevehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constantforce when shifting the transfer case lever.

4H to 4L or 4L to 4HWith the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shiftan automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or depress theclutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicleis coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfercase lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause intransfer case N (Neutral).

NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehiclesequipped with an automatic transmission may requireshutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash whilecompleting the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the auto-matic transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake,and turn the engine OFF. Make shift to desired mode.

172 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 173: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with thevehicle completely stopped, however, difficulty may oc-cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align-ment and shift completion to occur. The preferredmethod is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L withthe vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

WARNING!

Failure to engage a position completely can causetransfer case damage or loss of power and vehiclecontrol. You could have an injury accident. Do notdrive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fullyengaged.

TRAC-LOK™ REAR AXLEThe Trac-Lok™ rear axle provides a constant drivingforce to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin causedby the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If tractiondiffers between the two rear wheels, the differentialautomatically proportions the usable torque by providingmore torque to the wheel that has traction.

Trac-Lok™ is especially helpful during slippery drivingconditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, aslight application of the accelerator will supply maxi-mum traction. When starting with only one rear wheel onan excessively slippery surface, slight application of theparking brake may be necessary to gain maximum trac-tion.

STARTING AND OPERATING 173

5

Information Provided by:

Page 174: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off theground. The vehicle may drive through the rearwheel remaining on the ground and cause you tolose control of your vehicle.

AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK™) — IF EQUIPPED

The Axle Locker switch is located on the lower center ofthe instrument panel. This feature will only activatewhen the following conditions are met:

• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.

• The vehicle must be traveling at 10 mph (16 km/h) orless.

To activate the system, press the switch once to lock therear axle only (the REAR LOCK indicator light willilluminate), press the switch again to lock the front axle(the FRONT LOCK indicator light will illuminate). Oncethe rear axle is locked, pressing the switch again will lockor unlock the front axle.

NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles arefully locked or unlocked. A chime will sound three timesand the indicator lights will continue to flash at adifferent rate if the key is removed while the axles are stillin the locked position.

To unlock the axles, pull up on the switch.

174 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 175: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

PARKING BRAKETo set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly aspossible. When the parking brake is applied with theignition ON, the BRAKE warning light in the instrumentcluster will light.

NOTE: The BRAKE warning light indicates only thatthe parking brake is applied. It does not indicate thedegree of brake application.

NOTE: If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle isin motion, the BRAKE warning light will flash and achime will sound.

Before leaving the vehicle parked on a hill, you mustmake sure the parking brake is fully applied and placethe gear selector in the P (Park) position (automatictransmission) or first gear (manual transmission). Makecertain the transfer case is in gear. Failure to do so maycause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 175

5

Information Provided by:

Page 176: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-ing your vehicle, or vehicle may roll and causedamage or injury. Also be certain to leave aautomatic transmission in P (Park), or a manualtransmission in 1st gear. Make certain the transfercase is in gear. Failure to do so may cause thevehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

• If the parking brake is released, and the BRAKEwarning light glows while the ignition switch isON or the engine is running, there may be a brakesystem problem. Brake pedal travel, effort andstopping distances may increase, and you shouldobtain corrective service immediately.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parkingbrake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), other-wise the load on the transmission locking mechanismmay make it difficult to move the selector out of P (Park).

The parking brake should always be applied when thedriver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Leaving children unattended in a vehicle is dan-gerous for a number of reasons. A child or otherscould be injured. Children should be warned notto touch the parking brake or the gear selectorlever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A childcould operate controls or move the vehicle.

To release the parking brake, pull up slightly, press centerbutton, then lower lever completely.

176 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 177: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

If the parking brake is not completely released, theBRAKE warning light will remain on.

NOTE: Your vehicle has automatically adjusting rearbrakes and we do not recommend any adjustment otherthan the maintenance performed by your authorizeddealer.

ABOUT YOUR BRAKESYour vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes asstandard equipment. In the event power assist is lost forany reason (for example, repeated brake applicationswith the engine off), the brakes will still function. Theeffort required to brake the vehicle will be much greaterthan that required with the power system operating.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure andpossibly an accident. Driving with your foot restingor riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormallyhigh brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, andpossible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.

If either of two hydraulic systems lose normal capability,the remaining system will still function with some loss ofoverall braking effectiveness. This will be evident byincreased pedal travel during application and greaterpedal force required to slow or stop.

STARTING AND OPERATING 177

5

Information Provided by:

Page 178: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

To use your brakes and decelerate more safely, follow thesetips:

• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal.This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictablebraking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.

• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking cancause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoidrepeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmissionwhenever possible.

• Do not downshift on icy or slippery roads, because enginebraking may cause skidding and loss of control.

• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up, whichcould cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehiclecontrol. Be especially careful while driving on slipperyroads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking or stopping.Remember, always engage 4-wheel drive when driving onslippery roads.

• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially whenroads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can build upbetween the tire tread and the road. This hydroplaningaction can cause loss of traction, braking ability, andcontrol. Under such conditions, engage 4-wheel drive.

• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes maybecome wet, resulting in poor performance and unpredict-able braking action. Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittentpedal action while driving at very slow speeds.

WARNING!

The weight and position of cargo and passengers canchange the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personalinjury, follow these guidelines:

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor, andlocate heavier objects as low and as far forward aspossible.

• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rearaxle. Too much weight or improperly placed weightover or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of thevehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top ofthe seatback. This could impair visibility or becomea dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

• The rear cargo space is intended for load carryingpurposes only, not for passengers, who should sit inseats and use seat belts.

• On hardtop models, do not drive with the lift glassup. On fabric top models, do not drive with the rearwindow curtain up unless the side curtains are alsoopen. This will prevent dangerous exhaust fumesfrom entering the vehicle.

178 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 179: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

To help avoid personal injury, follow these tips:

• Never reach through the steering wheel to operatesteering column controls. Injury to your hands orloss of vehicle control may result.

• If the engine stalls or power assist fails due to amalfunction, vehicle steering and braking willrequire greater effort.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe Anti-Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driverin maintaining vehicle control under adverse brakingconditions. The system operates with a separate com-puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheellock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size andtype and tires must be properly inflated to produceaccurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!

Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixingsizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to lossof braking effectiveness.

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason, yourfoot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph (40km/h).

The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs duringthe self-test and during an ABS stop to provide theregulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes alow humming noise during operation, this is normal.

During off-road use, loss of traction can temporarilydefeat the system and cause the warning light to illumi-nate. Turn the ignition OFF and ON again to restoreAnti-Lock Brake System function.

STARTING AND OPERATING 179

5

Information Provided by:

Page 180: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminishtheir effectiveness and may lead to an accident.Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Justpress firmly on your brake pedal when you need toslow down or stop.

WARNING!

• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, norcan it increase braking or steering efficiency be-yond that afforded by the condition of the vehiclebrakes and tires or the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, includingthose resulting from excessive speed in turns,following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful drivercan prevent accidents.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user’s safetyor the safety of others.

180 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 181: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CAUTION!

The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possibledetrimental effects of electronic interference causedby improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele-phones.

NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsingsensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem is functioning.

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPSUtility vehicles have higher ground clearance and anarrower track to make them capable of performing in awide variety of off-road applications. Specific designcharacteristics give them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a betterview of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily inoff-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

When To Use Low RangeWhen driving off-road, shift to 4L (Low) for additionaltraction in pulling forward or descending a hill, forlow-speed pulling power or to improve handling andcontrol on slippery or difficult terrain. Also use 4L (Low)in rain, ice, snow, mud or sand to get heavy loads rolling,or whenever 4H (High) range four-wheel drive tractionwill not do the job.

In Snow, Mud and SandIn heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additionalcontrol at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a lowgear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low) if necessary.

STARTING AND OPERATING 181

5

Information Provided by:

Page 182: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Don’t shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintainheadway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheelsand traction will be lost.

Do not downshift on icy or slippery roads because enginebraking may cause skidding and loss of control.

When driving on soft sand, reduce your tire pressure to15 psi (103 kPa) minimum to allow greater tire surfacearea. You must return the tires to normal air pressurebefore driving on pavement or other hard surfaces.

NOTE: Reduced tire pressures below 15 psi (103 kPa)may cause tire unseating and loss of air pressure.

Hill ClimbingBefore climbing a steep hill, change transmission to alower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low). Usefirst gear and 4L (Low) for very steep hills.

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing asteep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop andimmediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shiftto R (Reverse). Back up slowly down the hill allowing thecompression braking of the engine and transmission to

help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required tocontrol vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoidlocking or skidding the tires.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannotmake it to the top of a steep hill or grade, neverattempt to turn around. To do so may result intipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back care-fully straight down a hill in R (Reverse) gear. Neverback down a hill in N (Neutral) or with the clutchpedal depressed, using only the brake.

Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill, alwaysdrive straight up or down.

If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of ahill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway byturning the front wheels sharply left and right. This willprovide fresh “bite” into the surface and will usuallyprovide traction to complete the climb.

182 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 183: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Traction DownhillShift the transmission into a low gear and transfer case to4L (Low) range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the hillwith all four wheels turning against engine compressiondrag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speedand direction.

After Driving Off-RoadOff-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle thandoes most on-road driving. After driving off-road, it isalways a good idea to check for damage.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, andexhaust system for damage.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly onthe chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to thevalues specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. Thesethings could be a fire hazard, or they might hidedamage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, orsimilar dirty conditions, have brake drums, brakelinings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soonas possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes maycause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. Youmight not have full braking power when you need itto prevent an accident. If you have been operatingyour vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakeschecked and cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving inmud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels forpacked material. Packed foreign material can cause awheel imbalance and freeing the wheels will correctthe situation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 183

5

Information Provided by:

Page 184: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE: P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.Example: P215/65R15 95H.

NOTE: European Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-pean design standards. Tires designed to this standardhave the tire size molded into the sidewall beginningwith the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from thistire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H

NOTE: LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based onU.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metrictires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the sizedesignation. Example: LT235/85R16.

NOTE: Temporary Spare tires are high pressure com-pact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.

NOTE: High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards and begins with the tire diametermolded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

184 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 185: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards(....blank....( = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT = Temporary Spare tire31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)

—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)R = Construction Code

—9R9 means Radial Construction.—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.

15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING 185

5

Information Provided by:

Page 186: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

EXAMPLE:Service Description:

95 = Load Index—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.

H = Speed Symbol—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load correspondingto its load index under certain operating conditions.—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions andposted speed limits).

Load Identification:(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) TireExtra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) TireLight Load = Light Load TireC,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for thistire.

186 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 187: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Tire Identification Number (TIN)The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tirehowever the date code may only be on one side. Tireswith white sidewalls will have the full TIN includingdate code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewalltires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found onthe outboard side then you will find it on the inboard sideof the tire.

EXAMPLE:DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tiresafety standards, and is approved for highway use.

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)

—01 means the year 2001.—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year inwhich the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.

STARTING AND OPERATING 187

5

Information Provided by:

Page 188: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The tire placard is located on the lower driver’sside instrument panel.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information aboutthe,1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle2) the total weight your vehicle can carry

3) the tire size designed for your vehicle4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rearand spare tires.

LoadingThe vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceedthe load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. Youwill not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if youadhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard and the Vehicle Loading section ofthis manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rearaxles must not be exceeded. For further information onGAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see theVehicle Loading section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of yourvehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The

188 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 189: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage andtrailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceedthe weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” onyour vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400–750 (5 x 15) =650 lb.)

5. determine the combined weight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE: The following table shows examples on how tocalculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacitiesof your vehicle with varying seating configurations andnumber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-tion purposes only and may not be accurate for theseating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE: For the following example the combined weightof occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392Kg).

STARTING AND OPERATING 189

5

Information Provided by:

Page 190: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

190 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 191: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloadingcan cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, andincrease your stopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for your vehicle-neveroverload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe andsatisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primaryareas are affected by improper tire pressure:

1. Safety—

WARNING!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and cancause accidents.

• Under inflation increases tire flexing and canresult in tire failure.

• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushionshock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can causedamage that results in tire failure.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affectvehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting inloss of vehicle control.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-mended pressure.

STARTING AND OPERATING 191

5

Information Provided by:

Page 192: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

2. Economy—Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wearpatterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormalwear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need forearlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increasestire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-tion.

3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stabilityof the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggishresponse or over-responsiveness in the steering.

Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-able steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause thevehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pressure is located on thelower driver’s side instrument panel.

The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted at leastonce every month. Check more often if subject to a widerange of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures varywith temperature changes.

Inflation pressures specified on the label are always“Cold Inflation Pressure.” Cold inflation pressure isdefined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has been idlefor at least 3 hours, or driven less than a mile after a 3hour period. The cold inflation pressure must not exceedthe maximum values molded into the tire sidewall.

Tire pressures may increase from 13 to 40 kPa (2 to 6 psi)[0.138 to 0.414 bar] during operation. DO NOT reducethis normal pressure buildup.

192 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 193: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

High Speed Operation

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under load isdangerous. The added strain on your tires couldcause them to fail. You could have a serious accident.Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity atcontinuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speedswithin posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at highspeeds, correct tire inflation pressure is very important.

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tireson your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handlepoorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-ways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combinethem with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only inthe tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult yourdealer for radial tire repairs.

Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do notspin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 193

5

Information Provided by:

Page 194: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-age or failure. A tire could explode and injuresomeone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels fasterthan 35 mph (55km/h) when you are stuck. And don’tlet anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what thespeed.

Tread Wear Indicators

These indicators are narrow strips 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)thick and are found in the tread pattern grooves.

When the tread pattern is worn down to these treadwearindicators, the tires should be replaced.

Overloading your vehicle, long trips in very hot weather,and driving on bad roads may result in greater wear.

Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of manycharacteristics. They should be inspected regularly forwear and correct inflation pressure. The manufacturerstrongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to theoriginals in quality and performance when replacementis needed (see section on tread wear indicators). Failureto use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affectthe safety, handling and ride of your vehicle. We recom-mend that you contact your original equipment tiredealer on any questions you may have on tire specifica-tions or capability.

194 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 195: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than thatspecified for your vehicle. Some combinations ofunapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-sion dimensions and performance characteristics,resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandling and stress to steering and suspension com-ponents. You could lose control and have an accidentresulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tireand wheel sizes with load ratings approved for yourvehicle.

• Never use a tire smaller than the minimum tire sizelisted on your vehicle’s tire label. Using a smaller tirecould result in tire overloading and failure. Youcould lose control and have an accident.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires havingadequate speed capability can result in sudden tirefailure and loss of vehicle control.

• Overloading your tires is dangerous. Overloadingcan cause tire failure. Use tires of the recommendedload capacity for your vehicle - never overload them.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different sizemay result in false speedometer and odometer read-ings. Check with your dealer before replacing tireswith a different size.

Alignment And BalanceTire suspension components of your vehicle should beinspected and aligned when needed, to obtain maximumtire tread life.

Poor suspension alignment may result in:

• reduced tread life;

• uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sidedwear,

• vehicle pull to the right or to the left.

Tires may also cause your vehicle to pull to the left orright. Alignment won’t correct this condition. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

STARTING AND OPERATING 195

5

Information Provided by:

Page 196: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration,which may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-balance.Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tirecupping and spotty wear.

TIRE CHAINSInstall chains on rear tires only. Tire chains may beinstalled on all models except Sahara. Follow theserecommendations to guard against damage and exces-sive tire and chain wear:

• Use chains on P205/75R15 or P215/75R15 tires only.P225/75R15, LT30 x 9.50R15, and LT245/75R16 tiresdo not provide adequate clearance.

• Use SAE class “S” tire chains or traction devices only.

• Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, asrecommended by the chain manufacturer.

• Follow tire chain manufacturer’s instructions formounting chains.

• Install chains snugly and tighten after.6 mile (1 km) ofdriving.

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously, avoiding large bumps, potholes andextreme driving maneuvers.

• Do not use chains or traction devices on the Poly-sparetire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONSTires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate atdifferent loads and perform different steering, handling,and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear atunequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile withaggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Roadtype tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute toa smooth, quiet ride.

196 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 197: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for yourtype of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusualwear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-formed.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”shown in the following diagram.

FUEL REQUIREMENTSYour engine is designed to meet all emis-sions regulations and provide excellentfuel economy and performance when us-ing high quality unleaded gasoline havingan octane rating of 87. The use of premiumgasoline is not recommended. The use of

premium gasoline will provide no benefit over highquality regular gasoline, and in some circumstances mayresult in poorer performance.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful toyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock athigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service isrequired. Engine damage resulting from operation with aheavy spark knock may not be covered by the newvehicle warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hardstarting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience thesesymptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-ering service for the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 197

5

Information Provided by:

Page 198: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Over 40 auto manufacturer’s world wide have issued andendorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel propertiesnecessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-fications if they are available.

Reformulated GasolineMany areas of the country require the use of cleanerburning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline.Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates, and is spe-cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-prove air quality.

The manufacturer strongly supports the use of reformu-lated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasolinewill provide excellent performance and durability for theengine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsSome fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-ates are required in some areas of the country during the

winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used inyour vehicle.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing METHANOL.Gasoline containing methanol may damage criticalfuel system components.

MMT In GasolineMMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that isblended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolineblended with MMT provides no performance advantagebeyond gasoline of the same octane number withoutMMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark pluglife and reduces emission system performance in somevehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasolinewithout MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT contentof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whetheror not his/her gasoline contains MMT.

198 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 199: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

It is even more important to look for gasoline withoutMMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levelshigher than allowed in the United States. MMT is pro-hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Sulfur In GasolineIf you live in the northeast United States, your vehiclemay have been designed to meet California low emissionstandards with clean burning, low sulfur, Californiagasoline. Gasoline sold outside of California is permittedto have higher sulfur levels which may affect the perfor-mance of the vehicle’s catalytic converter. This may causethe “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate.

Illumination of this light while operating on high sulfurgasoline does not necessarily mean your emission controlsystem is malfunctioning. The manufacturer recom-mends that you try a different brand of unleaded gaso-line having lower sulfur to determine if the problem isfuel related prior to returning your vehicle to an autho-rized dealer for service.

CAUTION!

If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing,immediate service is required. See “Onboard Diag-nostic System” in Section 7 of this manual.

Materials Added To FuelAll gasoline sold in the United States is required tocontain effective detergent additives. Use of additionaldetergents or other additives is not needed under normalconditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING 199

5

Information Provided by:

Page 200: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

FUEL FILLER CAP (GAS CAP)The fuel cap is located on the left side of the vehicle. If thefuel cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement capis for use with this vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission controlsystem could result from using an improper fuel cap(gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impuritiesinto the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting after-market cap can cause the MIL (Malfunction Indica-tor Light) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escapingfrom the system.

• Turn the engine off.

• Rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove.

• To replace the cap, insert it into the filler neck andtighten the cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click.This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.

• Make sure that the fuel cap tether strap is not caughtunder the fuel cap.

200 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 201: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “topoff” the fuel tank after filling.

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, thefuel tank is full.

WARNING!

• Remove the fuel cap (gas cap) slowly to preventfuel spray from the filler neck which may causeinjury.

• The volatility of some gasoline may cause abuildup of pressure in the fuel tank that mayincrease while you drive. This pressure can resultin a spray of gasoline and/or vapors when the capis removed from a hot vehicle. Removing the capslowly allows the pressure to vent and preventsfuel spray.

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or nearthe vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or thetank filled.

• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine isrunning.

STARTING AND OPERATING 201

5

Information Provided by:

Page 202: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into aportable container that is inside of a vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place gas containers on theground while filling.

Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) — If Equipped

• Turn the engine off.

• Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap, and turn thekey to the right to unlock the fuel cap. Rotate the fuelcap to the left to remove.

• To replace the cap, insert it into the filler neck andtighten the cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click.This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.

• Make sure that the fuel cap tether strap is not caughtunder the fuel cap.

• Be sure to remove the key.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “topoff” the fuel tank after filling.

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, thefuel tank is full.

TRAILER TOWINGIn this section you will find information on limits to thetype of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle.Before towing a trailer, carefully review this informationto tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirementsand recommendations in this manual concerning ve-hicles used for trailer towing.

Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the“Maintenance Schedules” section. When your vehicle isused for trailer towing, never exceed the gross axleweight rating (GAWR) by the addition of:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

202 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 203: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipmentput in or on your vehicle.

Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds tothe load on your vehicle.

Warranty RequirementsThe manufacturer’s warranty will apply to vehicles usedto tow trailers for noncommercial use, however thefollowing conditions must be met:

• The “D” Overdrive range can be selected when tow-ing. However, if frequent shifting occurs move theshift lever to the next lower position to eliminateexcessive automatic transmission shifting. This actionwill also reduce the possibility of transmission over-heating and provide better engine braking. Refer to“Transmission Shifting” in this section for additionalinformation.

• A load equalizing hitch is recommended for loadedtrailer weights above 1,000 lbs (454 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)loaded, it should have its own brakes and theyshould be of adequate capacity. Failure to do thiscould lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higherbrake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulicbrake lines can overload your brake system andcause it to fail. You might not have brakes when youneed them and could have an accident.

• Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailersize, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer aremandatory for motoring safety.

• Follow the maintenance intervals in schedule “B” forchanging the automatic transmission fluid and filter, ifyou REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45minutes of continuous operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 203

5

Information Provided by:

Page 204: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

204 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 205: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: Refer to “Recommended Fluids, Lubricants,and Genuine Parts” in Section 7 for axle differentiallubrication specifications for towing.

SNOW PLOWSnow plows should not be added to the front end of yourvehicle.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHINDMOTORHOME, ETC.)

CAUTION!

Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if afront or rear wheel lift is used when recreationaltowing.

NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neu-tral) for recreational towing.

Shifting Into Neutral (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle forrecreational towing.

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain thatthe transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) beforerecreational towing to prevent damage to internalparts.

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Shift automatic transmission into N (Neutral) or de-press clutch pedal on manual transmission.

3. Shift transfer case lever into N (Neutral).

4. Start engine.

5. Shift automatic transmission into D (Drive) or manualtransmission into gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 205

5

Information Provided by:

Page 206: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

6. Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehiclemovement.

7. Shut the engine off and place the ignition key into theunlocked OFF position.

8. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).

9. Apply parking brake.

10. Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar.

11. Release parking brake.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-mission is shifted into P (Park) with the transfer casein N (Neutral) and the engine running. With thetransfer case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine isoff prior to shifting the transmission into P (Park)(refer to steps 7 – 8 above).

Shifting Out Of Neutral (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle fornormal usage.

1. Shift automatic transmission into N (Neutral) or de-press clutch pedal on manual transmission.

2. Shift transfer case lever into desired position.

3. Shift automatic transmission into D (Drive) or releaseclutch on manual transmissions.

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral)on automatic transmission equipped vehicles, turningthe engine off may be required to avoid gear clash.

206 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Provided by:

Page 207: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave thevehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N(Neutral) position without first fully engaging theparking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) positiondisengages both the front and rear driveshafts fromthe powertrain and will allow the vehicle to movedespite the transmission position. The parkingbrake should always be applied when the driver isnot in the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow baron your vehicle. The bumper face bar will bedamaged.

STARTING AND OPERATING 207

5

Information Provided by:

Page 208: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Information Provided by:

Page 209: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

m Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

▫ Tool Kit Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

▫ Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

▫ Tire Changing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

m Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 6

Information Provided by:

Page 210: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERThe flasher switch is on top of the steering column, justbehind the steering wheel. Depress the switch and bothcluster indicators and all front and rear directional sig-nals will flash. Depress the switch again to turn HazardWarning Flashers off.

Do not use this emergency warning system when thevehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabledand is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, theflasher system will continue to operate with the ignitionkey removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear downyour battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you can reduce thepotential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-tion.

• On the highways — Slow down.

• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in N(Neutral), but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow downan impending overheat condition. If your air conditioneris on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat tothe engine cooling system and turning off the A/Cremoves this heat. You can also turn the Temperature

210 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Information Provided by:

Page 211: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Control to maximum heat, the Mode Control to floor, andthe Fan Control to High. This allows the heater core to actas a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heatfrom the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damageyour vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”,pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle withthe air conditioner turned off until the pointer dropsback into the normal range. If the pointer remains onthe “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn theengine off immediately, and call for service.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

Tool Kit LocationThe jack handle driver and jack extension are located in akit that is stored on the floor board to the right of thefront passenger seat. On some models, this tool kit isunder the carpeting in the same location.

Jack Location

The jack and lug wrench are stored under the frontpassenger seat.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 211

6

Information Provided by:

Page 212: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

To remove the jack from its stowage position, carefullyrelease the rubber strap from the bracket. Turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise to loosen jack and then remove itfrom the bracket.

WARNING!

Always store the jack, lug wrench, jack handledriver, jack extension, and spare, flat or damaged tiresecurely in the proper place. Never leave them loosein the vehicle where they could become dangerousprojectiles during a quick stop or collision.

WARNING!

The jack is designed to use as a tool for changingtires only. The jack should not be used to lift thevehicle for service purposes, unless suitable sup-ports are placed under the vehicle as a safety mea-sure. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm levelsurface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

CAUTION!

Never use your vehicle jack on the bumpers, sills orunderbody of your vehicle. Damage may result.Place your vehicle jack only under an axle and in thepositions shown for “Tire Changing Procedures.”

212 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Information Provided by:

Page 213: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Spare Tire LocationTo remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tirecover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lugwrench turning them counterclockwise. If equipped withan anti-theft lug nut (A), use the “Key” (B) and the lugwrench. The “Key” is stored in the glove box.

NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to thespare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a grossweight of 50 lbs (23 kg) including the weight of the sparetire.

Tire Changing Procedures

WARNING!

You can be injured or killed if you try to change awheel too close to moving traffic. Pull far enough offthe road to avoid being hit when operating the jackor changing the wheel.

Preparation

• Park on a firm, level surface well off the road, toprovide ample work space. Place automatic transmis-sion in P (Park), or manual transmission in R (Re-verse), and stop engine. Set parking brake firmly andactivate hazard warning flasher.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 213

6

Information Provided by:

Page 214: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Get everyone out of the vehicle before you jack it up.If the jack should fall, someone in the vehicle could behurt.

• Block tire diagonally oppo-site tire to be changed to pre-vent forward and backwardvehicle movement.

Instructions

1. Remove spare tire, jack and tools from stored location.

2. Before raising vehicle, loosen lug nuts on wheel withflat tire.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown. Connectjack handle driver (1) to extension (2) then to lug wrench(3).

4. Operate jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle.Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.

214 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Information Provided by:

Page 215: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

5. Use a clockwise rotation to raise the jack. Raise vehiclejust enough to be able to remove flat tire and install sparetire.

6. Remove lug nuts and wheel.

7. Position spare wheel/tire on vehicle and install lugnuts with cone-shaped end toward wheel. Lightly tightennuts clockwise. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle offthe jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle hasbeen lowered.

8. Lower the vehicle by using a counterclockwise rota-tion to lower the jack.

9. Finish tightening the lug nuts securely in crisscrosspattern as shown. Tighten to 85-110 ft. lbs. (115-149 N·m).

10. Remove jack assembly and wheel blocks.

11. Secure jack, lug wrench, jack handle driver, jackextension, and tire in proper locations.

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings tohelp prevent personal injury or damage to yourvehicle:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 215

6

Information Provided by:

Page 216: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from theedge of the roadway as possible before raising thevehicle.

• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.

• Always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheelbeing raised.

• Do not raise the vehicle higher than is necessary toremove the tire.

• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.

• Do not let passengers sit in the vehicle when it is on ajack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.

• Failure to follow the “Tire Changing Procedure” mayresult in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.

JUMP STARTING

WARNING!

To prevent personal injury or damage to clothing, donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, orfabrics. Do not lean over a battery when connectingjumper cables or allow cable clamps to touch eachother. Keep open flames or sparks away from batteryvent holes. Always wear eye protection when work-ing with batteries. Do not use a booster battery orany other booster source that has a greater than12–volt system, i.e. do not use a 24–volt powersource.

Your vehicle is equipped with a 12–volt battery. If itbecomes necessary to use a booster battery, with jumpercables, to start the vehicle’s engine because it’s battery isdischarged, the following procedure should be followed:

216 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Information Provided by:

Page 217: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Set the parking brake, place an automatic transmission inP (Park) (or N (Neutral) for a manual transmission). Turnoff lights, heater, and other electrical loads. Observecharge indicator in the battery. If indicator is light oryellow, replace the battery.

CAUTION!

Use the “Jump Starting” procedure only when thecharge indicator is dark in the center. Do not attemptjump starting when the battery charge indicator isbright or yellow. If the charge indicator is dark andhas a green dot in the center, failure to start is notdue to a discharged battery and the cranking systemshould be checked.

1. Attach one end of the jumper cable to the positiveterminal of the discharged battery and the other end ofthe same cable to the positive terminal of the boosterbattery.

WARNING!

Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as thiscould establish a ground connection and personalinjury could result.

2. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to thenegative terminal of the booster battery. Connect theother end of the jumper cable to a good ground on thevehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure a goodconnection is made, free of dirt and grease.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 217

6

Information Provided by:

Page 218: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Do not connect the cable to the negative terminalof the discharged battery. The resulting electricalspark could cause the battery to explode.

• During cold weather when temperatures are be-low freezing point, electrolyte in a dischargedbattery may freeze. Do not attempt jump startingbecause the battery could rupture or explode. Thebattery temperature must be brought up abovefreezing point before attempting to jump start.

3. Take care that the clamps from one cable do not touchclamps from the other cable. Do not lean over the batterywhen making the connection. The negative connectionmust provide good electrical conductivity and currentcarrying capacity.

4. After the engine is started or if the engine fails to start,the cables must be disconnected in the following order:

a. Disconnect the negative cable at the engineground.

b. Disconnect the negative cable at the negativeterminal on the booster battery.

c. Disconnect the cable from the positive terminalsof both batteries.

WARNING!

Any procedure other than above could result in:

• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirtingout the battery vent.

• Personal injury or property damage due to batteryexplosion.

• Damage to charging system of booster vehicle orof immobilized vehicle.

218 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Information Provided by:

Page 219: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLEThe manufacturer recommends towing with all fourwheels off the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow thevehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raisedand the other end on a towing dolly.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 219

6

Information Provided by:

Page 220: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Information Provided by:

Page 221: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

m 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

m 4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 225

m Emissions Inspection AndMaintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 231

▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

▫ Engine Timing Belt — 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . 233

▫ Ignition Wiring System — 2.4L Engine . . . . . . 233

▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 234

▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

▫ Driveline And Steering ComponentLubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

7

Information Provided by:

Page 222: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 242

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

▫ Hydraulic Clutch Fluid —Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Appearance Care And ProtectionFrom Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

m Fuse Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

▫ Underhood Fuses(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

m Replacement Bulbs — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 257

m Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

m Recommended Fluids, Lubricants AndGenuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

222 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 223: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

2.4L ENGINE

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 223

7

Information Provided by:

Page 224: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

4.0L ENGINE

224 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 225: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboarddiagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitorsthe performance of the emissions, engine, and automatictransmission control systems. When these systems areoperating properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II systemwill turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It willalso store diagnostic codes and other information toassist your service technician in making repairs. Al-though your vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-tor Light” on could cause further damage to theemission control system. It could also affect fueleconomy and driveability. The vehicle must beserviced before any emissions tests can be per-formed.

• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashingwhile the engine is running, severe catalytic con-verter damage and power loss will soon occur.Immediate service is required.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 225

7

Information Provided by:

Page 226: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legal requirement to passan inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states which have an I/M (Inspection andMaintenance) requirement, this check verifies thefollowing: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is readyfor testing.

Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBDsystem may not be ready if your vehicle was recentlyserviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a batteryreplacement. If the OBD system should be determinednot ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated testwhich you can use prior to going to the test station. Tocheck if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must dothe following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crankor start the engine.

3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to startthis test over.

4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, youwill see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normalbulb check.

5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things willhappen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenreturn to being fully illuminated until you turn offthe ignition key or start the engine. This means thatyour vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and youshould not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fullyilluminated until you turn off the ignition key orstart the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBDsystem is ready and you can proceed to the I/Mstation.

226 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 227: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

If your OBD system is not ready, you should see yourauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle wasrecently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,you may need to do nothing more than drive yourvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBDsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routinemay then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system isready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminatedduring normal vehicle operation, you should have yourvehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/Mstation can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is onwith the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTSUse of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduledmaintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-sure the designed performance. Damage or failurescaused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenanceand repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’swarranty.

DEALER SERVICEYour dealer has the qualified service personnel, specialtools and equipment to perform all service operations inan expert manner. Service Manuals are available whichinclude detailed service information for your vehicle.Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedureyourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 227

7

Information Provided by:

Page 228: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Do only that service work for whichyou have the knowledge and the proper equipment.If you have any doubt about your ability to performa service job, take your vehicle to a competentmechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESThe pages that follow contain the required maintenanceservices determined by the engineers who designed yourvehicle.

Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixedmaintenance intervals, there are other items that shouldoperate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, itcould adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.These items should be inspected if a malfunction isobserved or suspected.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil LevelTo assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, theengine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Checkthe oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, or beforestarting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground willimprove the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintainthe oil level between the ADD and SAFE markings on thedipstick. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when thereading is at the ADD mark will result in a SAFE readingon these engines.

228 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 229: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will causeaeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damageyour engine.

Change Engine OilRoad conditions as well as your kind of driving affect theinterval at which your oil should be changed. Check thefollowing to determine if any apply to you:

• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)

• Stop and go driving

• Extensive engine idling

• Driving in dusty conditions

• Short trip driving of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained highspeeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)

• Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service)

• Trailer towing

• Off-road or desert driving

• If equipped for and operating with E–85 (ethanol) fuel

If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine oilat every interval shown in schedule “B” of the “Mainte-nance Schedules” section of this manual.

If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oilat every interval shown on schedule “A” of the “Main-tenance Schedules” section of this manual

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 monthswhichever comes first.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 229

7

Information Provided by:

Page 230: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Engine Oil SelectionFor best performance and maximum protection for allengines under all types of operating conditions, themanufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChryslerMaterial Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine OilIdentification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API). Themanufacturer only recommendsAPI Certified engine oils.

Engine Oil Viscosity ChartThe proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should beselected based on the following recommendation and bewithin the operating temperature shown in the engine oilviscosity chart.

2.4L Engines

230 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 231: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Materials Added To Engine OilsThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) toengine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’sperformance may be impaired by supplemental addi-tives.

Disposing of Used Engine OilCare should be taken in disposing of used engine oil fromyour vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, canpresent a problem to the environment. Contact yourauthorized dealer, service station, or governmentalagency for advice on how and where used oil can besafely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be replaced at every engineoil change.

Engine Oil Filter SelectionAll of the manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow typedisposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assuremost efficient service. Mopart engine oil filters are highquality oil filters and are recommended.

Drive Belts — Check Condition and TensionAt the mileage shown in the appropriate “MaintenanceSchedule,” check all drive belts for condition and propertension. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippageand failure.

4.0L Engines

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 231

7

Information Provided by:

Page 232: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, orglazing and replace them if there is any sign of damagewhich could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-quired, adjust the belts according to the specificationsand procedures shown in the Service Manual.

Special tools are required to properly measure tensionand to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,check belt routing to make sure there is no interferencebetween the belts and other engine components.

Spark PlugsSpark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-stalled at the mileage specified in the appropriate main-tenance chart. The entire set should be replaced if there isany malfunction due to a faulty spark plug.

Refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” labelin the engine compartment for spark plug information.

Catalytic ConverterThe catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuelonly. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of theconverter as an emission control device.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assureproper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalystdamage.

CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if yourvehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. Inthe event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-ued operation of your vehicle with a severemalfunction could cause the converter to overheat,resulting in possible damage to the converter andvehicle.

232 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 233: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park overmaterials that can burn. Such materials might begrass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle inareas where your exhaust system can contact any-thing that can burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioningengine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severeand abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stopthe vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifica-tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignitionwhen the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing thevehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wiresdisconnected or removed, such as when diagnostictesting.

• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods duringvery rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi-tions.

• Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

Engine Timing Belt — 2.4L Engine

Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals describedin the appropriate maintenance schedule.

Ignition Wiring System — 2.4L Engine

Replace the ignition cables at the intervals described inthe appropriate maintenance schedule.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 233

7

Information Provided by:

Page 234: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Crankcase Emission Control SystemProper operation of this system depends on freedomfrom sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehiclemileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages mayaccumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TOCLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!

Check ventilation hose for indication of damage orplugging deposits. Replace if necessary.

Fuel FilterA plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit thespeed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should anexcessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,frequent replacement of the fuel filter which is mountedin the fuel tank may be necessary.

Engine Air Cleaner FilterUnder normal driving conditions, replace the air filter atthe intervals shown on “Maintenance Schedule A.” If,however, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty orsevere conditions, the filter element should be inspectedperiodically and replaced if necessary at the intervalsshown on “Maintenance Schedule B.”

WARNING!

The air cleaner can provide protection in the case ofengine backfire. Do not remove the air cleanerunless it is necessary for repair or maintenance.Make sure that no one is near the engine compart-ment before starting the vehicle with the air cleanerremoved. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury.

Maintenance-Free BatteryYour vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-tenance required.

WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-tain lead and lead compounds. Always wash handsafter handling the battery.

234 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 235: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

To determine the battery charge, check the battery testindicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. Refer to theillustration.

CAUTION!

It is essential when replacing the cables on thebattery that the positive cable is attached to thepositive post and the negative cable is attached to thenegative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positiveand negative (-) and identified on the battery case.Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in thevehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performance, your air conditionershould be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealerat the start of each warm season. This service shouldinclude cleaning of the condenser fins and a performancetest. Drive belt tension should also be checked at thistime.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 235

7

Information Provided by:

Page 236: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricantsapproved by the manufacturer for your air condi-tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants areflammable and can explode, injuring you. Otherunapproved refrigerants or lubricants can causethe system to fail, requiring costly repairs.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerantunder high pressure. To avoid risk of personalinjury or damage to the system, adding refrigerantor any repair requiring lines to be disconnectedshould be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery and RecyclingR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioningservice be performed by dealers or other service facilitiesusing recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Air Conditioning systems found to be contami-nated with A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, SealConditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants not ap-proved by the manufacturer, voids the warranty for theAir Conditioning system.

Power Steering Fluid CheckChecking the power steering fluid level at a definedservice interval is not required. The fluid should only bechecked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises areapparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certifiedDaimlerChrysler Dealership.9

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface withthe engine off to prevent injury from moving parts,and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do notoverfill. Use only the manufacturer’s recommendedfluid.

236 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 237: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicatedlevel. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from allsurfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, andGenuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Driveline And Steering Component LubricationU-joints (cardan joints) are sealed and do not requirelubrication. Prop shafts, yokes, ball joints and otherdriveline and steering components may be provided withgrease fittings for lubrication. Lubrication of these com-ponents at the intervals specified in the appropriate“Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 is very important,particularly if your vehicle is subjected to off-road orother heavy-duty use. See your authorized dealer forcomplete service information.

Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including such items asseat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should belubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operationand to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should bewiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricatingexcess oil and grease should be removed. Particular

attention should also be given to hood latching compo-nents to insure proper function. When performing otherunderhood services, the hood latch, release mechanismand safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice ayear, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a smallamount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart LockCylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper BladesClean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and thewindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and amild non-abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periodsmay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always usewasher fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirtfrom a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades toremove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the bladerubber out of contact with petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 237

7

Information Provided by:

Page 238: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Windshield Washers

The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should bechecked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill thereservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator anti-freeze) rated not to freeze at -25°F (-31°C). Operate thesystem for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

WARNING!

Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam-mable. They could ignite and burn you. Care mustbe exercised when filling or working around thewasher solution.

Windshield Washer AimingTo change the aim of the windshield washers, place asafety pin into the nozzle opening and move the nozzleslightly. Continue making slight adjustments until youobtain the desired pattern.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.

238 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 239: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seamsor loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seepinto the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect theexhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-cation or oil change. Replace as required.

Cooling System

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant orsteam from your radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, don’t open the hooduntil the radiator has had time to cool. Never try toopen a cooling system pressure cap when the radia-tor or coolant bottle is hot.

Coolant ChecksCheck coolant protection every 12 months (before theonset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant isdirty or rusty in appearance, the system should bedrained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.

Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation ofbugs, leaves, etc. Clean the radiator by gently sprayingwater from a garden hose at the back of the core.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for condition andtightness of connection. Inspect the entire system forleaks. Any hoses that show cuts or severe abrasion mustbe replaced.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And RefillAt the intervals shown in the appropriate “MaintenanceSchedule,” the system should be drained, flushed, andrefilled.

If the solution is dirty and contains a considerableamount of sediment, clean and flush with reliable coolingsystem cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to removeall deposits and chemicals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 239

7

Information Provided by:

Page 240: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Engine Coolant DisposalUsed ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulatedsubstance requiring proper disposal. Check with yourlocal authorities to determine the disposal rules for yourcommunity. Do not store ethylene glycol based enginecoolant in open containers or allow it to remain inpuddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals orchildren. If ingested by a child, contact a physicianimmediately.

Selection Of CoolantUse only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant, referto Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Partsfor correct coolant type.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of coolants other than the specified HOATcoolant may result in decreased corrosion protec-tion and engine damage that may not be coveredunder the new vehicle warranty. If a non-HOATcoolant is introduced into the cooling system in anemergency, it should be replaced with the speci-fied coolant as soon as possible.

• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol baseantifreeze products. Do not use additional rustinhibitors or antirust products, as they may not becompatible with the radiator coolant and mayplug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use withPropylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-lene Glycol base coolants is not recommended.

240 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 241: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Adding CoolantWhen adding coolant, a minimum solution of recom-mended 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in watershould be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed70%) if temperatures below -37°F (-38°C) are anticipated.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionizedwater when mixing the water/antifreeze solution. Theuse of lower quality water will reduce the amount ofcorrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of theengine coolant and will require more frequent enginecoolant changes.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-cording to the temperatures occurring in the area wherethe vehicle is operated.

Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss ofcoolant, and to insure that coolant will return to theradiator from the coolant reserve tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is anyaccumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on thecooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.Never add coolant when the engine is overheated.Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up inthe cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, donot remove the pressure cap while the system is hotor under pressure.

Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides a quick visual method fordetermining that the coolant level is adequate. Thecoolant level must be at the FULL mark or above theADD mark on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there isnot need to remove the radiator cap unless checking forcoolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 241

7

Information Provided by:

Page 242: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

service attendant of this. As long as the engine operatingtemperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need onlybe checked once a month.

When additional coolant is needed to maintain theproper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Donot overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles ofoperation, you may observe vapor coming from the frontof the engine compartment. This is normally a result ofmoisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulat-ing on the radiator and being vaporized when thethermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to enter theradiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows noevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may besafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.

• Check coolant freeze point in the system.

• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if thelevel in the recovery bottle does not drop when theengine cools, the cooling system should be pressuretested for leaks.

• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% ethylene glycolantifreeze (minimum) in water for proper corrosionprotection of your engine that contains aluminumcomponents.

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hosesare not kinked or obstructed.

• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winteroperation. If replacement is ever necessary, installONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs mayresult in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gasmileage, and increased emissions.

Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor HarnessesInspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidenceof heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.

242 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 243: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heatsources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source ormoving component that may cause heat damage ormechanical wear.

Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted orcollapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clampsand couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaksare present. Components should be replaced immedi-ately if there is any evidence of degradation that couldcause failure.

Brake SystemIn order to assure brake system performance, all brakesystem components should be inspected periodically.Refer to the appropriate “Maintenance Schedule” inSection 8 for suggested service intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure andpossibly an accident. Driving with your foot restingor riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormallyhigh brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, andpossible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.

Brake and Power Steering System HosesWhen servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me-chanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears,cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling suggest deteriora-tion of the rubber. Particular attention should be made toexamining those hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure theyare secure and no leaks are present.

NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be donewhenever the brake system is serviced and every engineoil change.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 243

7

Information Provided by:

Page 244: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.You could have an accident. If you see any signs ofcracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brakehoses replaced immediately.

Brake Master CylinderThe fluid level in the master cylinder should be checkedwhen performing under hood services, or immediately ifthe BRAKE warning light shows system failure

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area beforeremoving the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring thefluid level up to the requirements described on the brakefluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can beexpected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid levelshould be checked when pads are replaced. However,low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkupmay be needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid, referto Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Partsfor correct fluid type.

WARNING!

• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initialboiling point or unidentified as to specification,may result in sudden brake failure during hardprolonged braking. You could have an accident.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result inspilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and thebrake fluid catching fire.

244 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 245: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closedcontainer to avoid contamination from foreign matter. Donot allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brakefluid as seal damage will result.

Automatic Transmission

Selection of LubricantIt is important that the proper lubricant is used in thetransmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-sion fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, andGenuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important thatthe transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribedlevel using the recommended fluid.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-turer’s recommended fluid may cause deteriorationin transmission shift quality and/or torque convertershudder. Using a transmission fluid other than themanufacturer’s recommended fluid will result inmore frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer toRecommended Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts for correct fluid type.

Fluid Level Check — 42RLEThis fluid level should be checked when the engine isfully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission isheated to its normal operating temperature. Operation ofthe transmission with an improper fluid level will greatlyreduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid.

To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,the following procedure must be used:

1. The vehicle must be on level ground.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 245

7

Information Provided by:

Page 246: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for aminimum of 60 seconds.

3. Fully apply parking brake.

4. Apply the brakes and shift the transmission into P(Park).

5. The fluid MUST be checked with the transmission inP (Park) to be sure that the fluid level is accurate.

6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.Remove dipstick and note reading.

At normal operating temperature (approximately 180° F(82° C), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region(cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluidlevel indicator should be in the COLD region at 70° F (21°C) fluid temperature.

If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid to bring to theproper level. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricantsand Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Fluid is added through the dipstick tube.

NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering thetransmission after checking or replenishing fluid, makecertain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated.

Special AdditivesThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-dition of any additives to the transmission. The onlyexception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid indetecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealersshould be avoided as they may adversely affect seals.

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid — Manual TransmissionThe clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance freesystem. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, thesystem must be replaced.

Manual Transmission

Selection of LubricantUse only manufacturer’s recommended manual trans-mission fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants,and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

246 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 247: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Fluid Level CheckCheck the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluidlevel should be between the bottom of the fill hole and apoint not more than 3/16” (4.76 mm) below the bottom ofthe hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency of Fluid ChangeUnder normal operating conditions, the fluid installed atthe factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life ofthe vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless thelubricant has become contaminated with water. If con-taminated with water, the fluid should be changed im-mediately.

Transfer Case

Fluid Level CheckThe fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fillhole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.

Adding FluidFluid should be added only at filler hole until fluidbegins to run out of the hole.

DrainFirst remove fill plug (B), then drain plug (C). Recom-mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is15–25 ft.lbs. (20–34 N·m).

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 247

7

Information Provided by:

Page 248: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

CAUTION!

When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You coulddamage them and cause them to leak.

Selection of LubricantUse only manufacturer’s recommended fluid, refer toRecommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts forcorrect fluid type.

Front/Rear Axle Fluid

Fluid Level CheckLubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole.

Adding FluidAdd lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the levelspecified above.

Selection of LubricantUse only manufacturer’s recommended fluid, refer toRecommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts forcorrect fluid type.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From CorrosionVehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roadspassable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed ontrees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highlycorrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extremehot or cold weather and other extreme conditions willhave an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

248 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 249: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

The following maintenance recommendations will enableyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosionresistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal ofpaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near sea-coast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

• Bird droppings.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap and rinsethe panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.

• Use Mopart Auto Polish to remove road film andstains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never toscratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffingthat may diminish the gloss or thin out the paintfinish.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materialssuch as steel wool or scouring powder, which willscratch metal and painted surfaces.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 249

7

Information Provided by:

Page 250: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models

CAUTION!

To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interiortrim and top, follow these precautions:

• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the topdown, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interiortrim.

• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on topmaterial, as damage may result.

• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dryon the paint, leaving a streak.

• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always makesure it is completely dry before lowering.

• Be especially careful when washing the windows byfollowing the directions for “Care of Fabric Top Win-dows.”

WASHING — Always use mild soap suds, lukewarmwater, and a brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning isrequired, use a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top,but support top from underneath.

RINSING — Be sure to remove all trace of cleaner byrinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Rememberto allow the top to dry before lowering it.

Care Of Fabric Top Windows

CAUTION!

Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windowswhich can be scratched unless special care is takenby following these directions:

1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use asoft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm, cleanwater, and wipe across the window, not up and down.

2. When washing, never use hot water or anythingstronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such asalcohol or harsh cleaning agents.

250 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 251: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipewith a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.

4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraperor de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you mustclean the window quickly.

5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-roaddriving will have a major impact on zipper operation.Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing willeventually impact window zipper operation. To maintainease of use of the window zippers, each window zippershould be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Use MopartSoft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant to ease zipperoperation. Before applying, make sure the zipper teethare clear of sand, mud, and other materials. Clean bothsides of the zipper, not just one side. Rinse both zipperhalves with fresh water and allow to dry. Aggressivelywork the Mopart Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricantinto the zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper slide is experi-enced, work the Mopart Soft Top Zipper Cleaner andLubricant into the zipper slide. Several applications maybe required before the zipper comes free.

6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to thewindows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam-age the windows.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drivenear the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least oncea month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edgesof the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be keptclear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs isconsidered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are wellpackaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, considermud or stone shields behind each wheel.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 251

7

Information Provided by:

Page 252: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Use Mopart Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips assoon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch uppaint to match the color of your vehicle.

• Aluminum wheels should be cleaned regularly withmild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To removeheavy soil, select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.Do not use scouring pads or metal polishes. Avoidautomatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harshbrushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin-ish.

Interior CareUse Mopart Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholsteryand carpeting.

Use Mopart Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl or leatherupholstery.

Mopart Vinyl Cleaner is specifically recommended forinterior vinyl trim.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.Many are potentially flammable, and if used inclosed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basiswith any commercial household-type glass cleaner.Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution whencleaning inside rear windows equipped with electricdefrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-ments which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on thetowel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleanerdirectly on the mirror.

CarpetVacuum your carpet regularly to prevent a soil build-up.Shampoo soiled carpet with a reliable upholstery cleaner,using a natural sponge or soft bristle brush. After carpetdries, vacuum it thoroughly.

252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 253: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARNING!

Only remove the carpet for cleaning purposes. Itprovides insulation against high floor pan tempera-tures. You or your passengers could be burned if thecarpet is not properly in place. Always put the carpetback into the vehicle before driving.

Follow These Steps To Remove The Carpet:

1. Unsnap the front and rear floor carpets. A snap islocated on the outboard side of each front seat.

2. Remove the attachment cap from the front footwellarea on both the driver and passenger side. The cap isremoved by pulling it straight out.

3. Remove the front and rear floor carpets.

4. Remove the cargo floor and wheelhouse carpets.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an Add-A-Trunk™ it must be removed to be able to remove the cargofloor and wheelhouse carpets. For Add-A-Trunk™ removalprocedure, refer to “Storage” in Section 3 of this manual.

Follow These Steps To Replace The Carpet:

1. Place the front floor carpets in the vehicle.

2. Attach the carpet to the studs in the footwell and presson the attachment caps to secure the carpet.

3. Place rear floor carpet in vehicle and snap rear carpetto front floor carpet.

4. Install wheelhouse carpet followed by the cargo floorcarpet.

5. Reinstall Add-A-Trunk™ if so equipped.

Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemicalsolvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution orlukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from thevehicle to wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if thebuckles do not work properly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 253

7

Information Provided by:

Page 254: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Maintenance After Off-Road DrivingAfter extended operation in mud, sand or water, orsimilar dirty conditions, have your brake drums, brakelinings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon aspossible. This will prevent any abrasive material fromcausing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.

Following off-road usage, completely inspect the under-body of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steer-ing, suspension and exhaust system for damage. Checkthreaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on thechassis, drivetrain components, steering and suspension.Retighten, if required, to torque values specified in theService Manual. Also check for accumulations of vegeta-tion or brush that could become a fire hazard, or concealdamage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, andpropeller shafts. Check air conditioning drain tube on thelower dash wall in the engine compartment for mud ordebris, and clean as required. A plugged tube willadversely affect air conditioning performance.

CAUTION!

Under frequent heavy-duty driving conditions,change all lubricants, and lubricate body compo-nents and steering linkage more often than in nor-mal service to prevent excessive wear.

FUSE PANEL

Interior FusesThe fuse panel is located behind the glove box.

254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 255: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

To access the fuse panel the glove box must be removed.It is removed by slipping the glove box strap off the hookand letting the door roll down off its hinges. To reinstall,position the glove box door at an 8 o’clock orientation,engage the hinge hook formations on the lower edge ofthe glove box door with the hinge pins on the lower edgeof the instrument panel. Tilt the upper edge of the glovebox door upward toward the instrument panel enough toreattach the glove box strap to the door. Rotate glove boxdoor to closed position. Open and close to insure properinstallation.Cavity Fuse Description

1 20 Amp Yellow Park Lights, Skim(Sentry Key)

2 20 Amp Yellow Stop Lights3 20 Amp Yellow Subwoofer System4 10 Amp Red Door Switch Defeat5 10 Amp Red Airbag6 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper7 10 Amp Red Back-Up Lights, Rear Win-

dow Defroster Relay, ABS8 10 Amp Red HEVAC

Cavity Fuse Description9 10 Amp Red Airbag

10 10 Amp Red Instrument Cluster11 10 Amp Red Solenoids, DRL12 10 Amp Red Power Distribution Relays,

Skim (Sentry Key)13 10 Amp Red Turn Signals14 10 Amp Red Radio15 10 Amp Red HBL (Rear Window De-

froster) Switch16 10 Amp Red Headlamp Aim (Export

Only)17 25 Amp Natu-

ralFront Wiper

18 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter19 20 Amp Yellow Spare20 20 Amp Yellow Transmission: Manual -

Clutch Interlock Switch By-pass Automatic - IgnitionStarter Circuit

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 255

7

Information Provided by:

Page 256: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-bution center located in the engine compartment near thebattery. This power center houses plug-in “Cartridge”fuses, ISO relays, and Mini (Micro) fuses.

A label inside the latching cover of the center identifieseach component for ease of replacement, if necessary.Cartridge and mini (micro) fuses can be obtained fromyour authorized dealer.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.You may:

• Remove Cartridge fuse #15 in the Power DistributionCenter labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).

• Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power DistributionCenter location #11 labeled “IOD Storage.”

• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out ofservice (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run theair conditioning system at idle for about five minutesin the fresh air and high blower setting. This willinsure adequate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when the system isstarted again.

256 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 257: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

REPLACEMENT BULBS — IF EQUIPPED

Interior Lights Bulb TypeAuto. Trans. Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658Courtesy Lights, Under Dash (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906Heater Control Lights (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Rocker Switch Indicator Light (Rear WindowDefogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . **Soundbar Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.

Instrument Cluster Bulb TypeTelltale (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Exterior Lights Bulb TypeBackup Lights (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156Center High Mounted Stop Light (1) . . . . 921 or W16WFog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3Front Park/Turn Lights (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157Front Side Marker Lights (2) . . . . . . . . . . 168 or W3WHeadlights (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H 6024BLStop/Tail/Turn Lights (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157Underhood Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types thatcan be purchased from your local authorized dealer.

If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorizeddealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 257

7

Information Provided by:

Page 258: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. MetricFuel (Approximate) 19 Gallons 72 LitersEngine Oil with Filter

2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified Engine Oil) 5 Qts 4.7 Liters4.0 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified Engine Oil) 6 Qts 5.7 Liters

Cooling System *2.4 Liter Engine (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000

Mile Formula)9 Qts 8.5 Liters

4.0 Liter Engine (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000Mile Formula)

10.5 Qts 9.9 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

258 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 259: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTSEngine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-

ganic Additive Technology)Engine Oil API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil is recommended for the 2.4L engine. API

Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil is recommended for the 4.0L engine. Refer tooil viscosity chart for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler MaterialStandard MS-6395.

Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compart-ment.

Oil Filter (2.4L Engine) Mopart Oil Filter (P/N 4105409)Oil Filter (4.0L Engine) Mopart Oil Filter (P/N 05281090)Fuel Selection 87 Octane

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 259

7

Information Provided by:

Page 260: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAutomatic Transmission Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.Manual Transmission Mopart Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent.Transfer Case Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.Axle Differential (front-rear) Mopart Hypoid Gear Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL5) or equivalent. For

trailer towing, use a SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Modelsequipped with Trac-Lok require an additive.

Brake Master Cylinder Mopart DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluidis not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake flu-ids.

Power Steering Reservoir Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.Steering Gear & Linkage, BallJoints, Prop Shafts & Yokes, WheelBearings

Mopart Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB

260 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Provided by:

Page 261: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 262

m Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 262: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in boldtype must be done at the times or mileages specified toassure the continued proper functioning of the emissioncontrol system. These, and all other maintenance servicesincluded in this manual, should be done to provide bestvehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operatingconditions such as dusty areas and very short tripdriving.

Inspection and service also should be done any time amalfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systems on your vehiclemay be performed by any automotive repair establish-ment or individual using any automotive part which hasbeen certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State ofCalifornia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESThere are two maintenance schedules that show therequired service for your vehicle.

First is Schedule (B(. It is for vehicles that are operatedunder the conditions that are listed below and at thebeginning of the schedule.

• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)

• Stop and go driving

• Excessive engine idling

• Driving in dusty conditions

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained highspeeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)

• Trailer towing

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)

• Off-road or desert driving

• If equipped for and operated with E-85 (ethanol)fuel.

262 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 263: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditionslisted for Schedule “B.”

Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are notoperated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-ule “B.”

Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow theinterval that occurs first.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance itemsmay result in damage to the vehicle.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fullywarmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level whilethe vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when thelevel is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent, add as required.

Once a Month

• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear ordamage.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminalsas required.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brakemaster cylinder, and transmission, and add as needed.

• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correctoperation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the exhaust system.

• Inspect brake hoses.

• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.

• Inspect manual transmission fluid level — ifequipped.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 263

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 264: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

• Rotate the tires at each oil change interval shown onSchedule “A” 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or every otherinterval shown on Schedule “B” 6,000 miles (10 000km).

• After completion of off-road operation, the undersideof the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected. Exam-ine threaded fasteners for looseness.

264 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 265: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Schedule “B”Follow this schedule if you usually operate your vehicleunder one or more of the following conditions.

• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)

• Stop and go driving

• Excessive engine idling

• Driving in dusty conditions

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained highspeeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)

• Trailer towing

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)

• Off-road or desert driving

• If equipped for and operated with E-85 (ethanol)fuel.

Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (14 000) (19 000) (24 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Lubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ X

SCHEDULE “B” 265

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 266: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000(Kilometers) (29 000) (34 000) (38 000) (43 000) (48 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.L XReplace the spark plugs. XLubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X X XInspect the brake linings. XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ XInspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary. X

266 SCHEDULE “B”

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 267: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000(Kilometers) (53 000) (58 000) (62 000) (67 000) (72 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Lubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ XInspect the drive belt and replace as needed. X

SCHEDULE “B” 267

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 268: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000(Kilometers) (77 000) (82 000) (86 000) (91 000) (96 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.L XInspect the ignition cables, and replace if neces-sary (2.4L Only).

X

Replace the spark plugs. XLubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X X XInspect the brake linings. X XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ X XDrain and refill the automatic transmission fluid,and change filter.

X

Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed. Notrequired if belt was previously.

X

Drain and refill the transfer case fluid. X

268 SCHEDULE “B”

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 269: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000 75,000(Kilometers) (101 000) (106 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Lubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ XInspect the drive belt and replace as needed. Notrequired if belt was previously replaced.

X

SCHEDULE “B” 269

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 270: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000) (144 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.L XReplace the spark plugs. XLubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X X XReplace the timing belt (2.4L Only). XInspect the brake linings. XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ XInspect the drive belt and replace as needed. Notrequired if belt was previously replaced.

X

Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary. X

270 SCHEDULE “B”

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 271: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000 105,000(Kilometers) (149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (163 000) (168 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Lubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ XInspect the drive belt and replace as needed. Notrequired if belt was previously replaced.

X

Flush and replace the engine coolant. X

SCHEDULE “B” 271

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 272: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000(Kilometers) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, replace ifnecessary.

X

Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.L XReplace the spark plugs. XInspect the ignition cables, and replace if neces-sary (2.4L Only).

X

Lubricate the steering linkage tie rod ends. X X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X X XInspect the brake linings. X XDrain and refill the front and rear axle fluid‡ X XDrain and refill the automatic transmission fluid,and replace main sump filter.

X

Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed. Notrequired if belt was previously replaced.

X

Drain and refill the transfer case fluid. X

Inspection and service should also be performed anytimea malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-ceipts.

L This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-turer to the owner, but is not required to maintainemissions warranty.

272 SCHEDULE “B”

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 273: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

‡Off-highway operation, trailer towing, taxi, limousine,bus, snow plowing, or other types of commercial serviceor prolonged operation with heavy loading, especially in

hot weather, require front and rear axle service indicatedwith a ‡ in Schedule “B”. Perform these services if thevehicle is usually operated under these conditions.

SCHEDULE “B” 273

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 274: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Schedule “A”

Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000(Kilometers) (10 000) (19 000) (29 000) (38 000) (48 000)[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, and replaceif necessary.

X

Replace the spark plugs. XLubricate the steering linkage joints and outer tierod ends.

X X X X X

Lubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XInspect the transfer case fluid. X

274 SCHEDULE “A”

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 275: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54, 000(Kilometers) (58 000) (67 000) (77 000) (86 000)[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54]Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XLubricate the steering linkage joints and outer tie rodends.

X X X X

Inspect the brake linings. X X

SCHEDULE “A” 275

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 276: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000(Kilometers) (96 000) (106 000) (115 000) (125 000)[Months] [60] [66] [72] [78]Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, and replace if nec-essary.

X

Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.L XReplace the ignition cables (2.4L Only). XReplace the spark plugs. XLubricate the steering linkage joints and outer tie rodends.

X X X X

Lubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XInspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. XInspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not re-quired if belt was previously replaced.

X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months, re-gardless of mileage.

X

Inspect transfer case fluid. X

276 SCHEDULE “A”

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 277: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 84,000 90,000 96,000 102, 000(Kilometers) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (163 000)[Months] [84] [90] [96] [102]Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X XInspect the engine air filter element, and replace if nec-essary.

X

Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.L XReplace the spark plugs. XLubricate the steering linkage joints and outer tie rodends.

X X X X

Lubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XInspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not re-quired if previously replaced.

X X

Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60months.

X

Inspect the transfer case fluid. X

SCHEDULE “A” 277

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 278: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000(Kilometers) (173 000) (182 000) (192 000)[Months] [108] [114] [120]Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X XInspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necessary. XReplace the ignition cables (2.4L Only). XInspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.L XReplace the spark plugs. XLubricate the steering linkage joints and outer tie rod ends. X X XLubricate the steering and suspension ball joints. X XInspect the brake linings. XReplace the timing belt (2.4L Only). XInspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if pre-viously replaced.

X

Drain and refill the transfer case fluid. X

Inspection and service should also be performed anytimea malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-ceipts.

L This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-turer to the owner, but is not required to maintainemissions warranty.

278 SCHEDULE “A”

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

Information Provided by:

Page 279: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

m Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

9

Information Provided by:

Page 280: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The AppointmentIf you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have theright papers with you. Take your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not be covered by thewarranty, discuss additional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history. This can often provide a clue to thecurrent problem.

Prepare A ListMake a written list of your vehicle’s problems or thespecific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let theservice advisor know.

Be Reasonable With RequestsIf you list a number of items, and you must have yourvehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation withthe service advisor and list the items in order of priority.At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a

minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisableto make these arrangements when you call for an ap-pointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested inyour satisfaction. We want you to be happy with ourproducts and services.

Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious toprovide prompt resolution for any warranty issue orrelated matter that you may experience. The manufactur-er’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained techni-cians, special tools, and the latest information to assureyour vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.The manufacturer has empowered its dealers to makewarranty and repair decisions that ensure you are notinconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for adecision from the manufacturer. If a special circumstanceoccurs that requires information from the manufacturer,we have asked the dealer’s service management to makethe contact on your behalf.

280 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Information Provided by:

Page 281: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

This is why you should always talk to your dealer’sservice manager first. Most matters can be resolved withthis process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to thegeneral manager or owner of the dealership. Theywant to know if you need assistance.

• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, youmay contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.

Any communication to the Manufacturer’s CustomerCenter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Dealership name

• Vehicle identification number

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation CustomerCenterP.O. Box 21–8004Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 992-1997

DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer CenterP.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone —(800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240Sante Fe C.P. 05109Mexico, D. F.In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or SpeechImpaired (TDD/TTY)To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, themanufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its CustomerCenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer whohas access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter(TTY) in the United States can communicate with themanufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 281

9

Information Provided by:

Page 282: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Service ContractYou may have purchased a service contract for yourvehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehiclelimited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If youpurchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you willreceive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Cardin the mail within three weeks of your vehicle deliverydate. If you have any questions about your servicecontract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any servicecontract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. Itis not responsible for any service contract other than themanufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a

service contract that is not a manufacturer’s ServiceContract, and you require service after your manufactur-er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer toyour contract documents, and contact the person listed inthose documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investmentwhen you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer hasalso made a major investment in facilities, tools, andtraining to assure that you are absolutely delighted withyour ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with theirsincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or relatedconcerns.

282 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Information Provided by:

Page 283: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

WARRANTY INFORMATIONSee your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Bookletfor information on warranty coverage and transfer ofwarranty.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 283

9

Information Provided by:

Page 284: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

MOPART PARTSMopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories areavailable from your dealer. They will help you keep yourvehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSIn the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If youbelieve that your vehicle has a defect which could causea crash or cause injury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer, and themanufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. ofTransportation, Washington DC 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor vehicle safety fromthe Hotline.

In Canada:If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, youshould contact the Customer Service Department imme-diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safetydefect to the Canadian government should write toTransport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigationsand Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B3V9.

284 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Information Provided by:

Page 285: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMSTo order the following manuals, you may use either thewebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please callfor an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when orderingmanuals. (No P.O. Boxes).

• Service Manuals.

These comprehensive service manuals provide theinformation that students and professional techniciansneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChryslerCorporation vehicles. A complete working knowledgeof the vehicle, system and/or components is written instraightforward language with illustrations, diagramsand charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,these practical manuals make it easy for students and

technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They showexactly how to find and correct problems the first time,using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveabilityprocedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete listof all tools and equipment.

• Owner’s Manuals.

These manuals have been prepared with the assistanceof service and engineering specialists to acquaint youwith specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included arestarting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-cedures as well as specifications, capabilities andsafety tips.

Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the World Wide Web at:

www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com orwww.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 285

9

Information Provided by:

Page 286: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Information Provided by:

Page 287: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

INDEX

10

Information Provided by:

Page 288: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Add-A-Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Air Cleaner, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 154Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,118Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Ashtrays and Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,245

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

288 INDEX

Information Provided by:

Page 289: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 39Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Carpeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 148Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . 126,130,132,140,142Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,138CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,135,137CD Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Check Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,33,36Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Clutch Interlocking Ignition System . . . . . . 160,165Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

INDEX 289

10

Information Provided by:

Page 290: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240,258Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . 234Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,153Delay Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Deploying, Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

DipsticksOil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Disposal

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181On Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181When to Use Low Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Emergency, In Case of

Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

290 INDEX

Information Provided by:

Page 291: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 226,262Engine

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,258Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,258Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,252Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Flashers

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

INDEX 291

10

Information Provided by:

Page 292: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Gauges

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,166Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Headlights

Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

292 INDEX

Information Provided by:

Page 293: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,243Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

IgnitionKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,30Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tetherfor CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Lighter, Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,118Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Check Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

INDEX 293

10

Information Provided by:

Page 294: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,116Upshift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 116

Loading VehicleTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Lower Anchors and Tether forCHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Maintenance, Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Schedule 9A9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Schedule 9B9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,226Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,246

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Compass/Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

294 INDEX

Information Provided by:

Page 295: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,284Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Octane Rating, Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Off-Pavement Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,258Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,226Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 188Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Power

Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Pressure Gauge, Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,130,135,140Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,135,149Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

INDEX 295

10

Information Provided by:

Page 296: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 205Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . 206

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 21And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,36Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Rear Seat Cushion Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

296 INDEX

Information Provided by:

Page 297: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 164Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,116Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Specifications

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Steering

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,256Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 22

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . 118Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

INDEX 297

10

Information Provided by:

Page 298: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . 188Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 187Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,213General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Pressure Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,219

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,246Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

298 INDEX

Information Provided by:

Page 299: TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../jeep/2004-wrangler.pdfSECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,116

Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Vinyl Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Warning Lights (InstrumentCluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,153Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Windshield Washer Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,238

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

INDEX 299

10

Information Provided by: